Panasonic SCPMX92 Instrukcja obsługi

SCPMX92
Panasonic
Marka
Panasonic
Model
SCPMX92
Kategoria
Odtwarzacze CD
Typ
Instrukcja obsługi
TQBM0358
SC-PMX92
SC-PMX90
[PMX92]
Dziękujemy za zakupienie tego produktu.
Przed przystąpieniem do eksploatacji opisywanego produktu
należy dokładnie przeczytać niniejsze zalecenia i zachować
instrukcję obsługi do wglądu.
Instrukcja obsługi
Zestaw stereo z CD
Model Nr
Spis treści
Konserwacja ......................................................................................... 2
Środki ostrożności ............................................................................... 2
Dostarczone wyposażenie ................................................................... 3
Rozmieszczenie głośników ................................................................. 3
Podłączenie ........................................................................................... 4
Opis elementów sterowania ................................................................ 5
Przygotowanie pilota zdalnego sterowania ....................................... 5
Informacje o Bluetooth
®
....................................................................... 6
Odtwarzanie przez Bluetooth
®
............................................................. 6
Informacje o nośnikach ....................................................................... 7
Umieszczanie nośników ...................................................................... 7
Przyciski odtwarzania z nośników ...................................................... 8
Radio FM ............................................................................................... 9
DAB/DAB+ ................................................................................. 9
Zegar i timer .........................................................................................10
Efekty dźwiękowe ................................................................................10
Wejście AUX IN ....................................................................................11
Korzystanie z wejścia komputera ......................................................11
Inne .......................................................................................................12
Rozwiązywanie problemów ................................................................12
Dane techniczne ..................................................................................14
TQBM0358
2
SC-PMX92 SC-PMX90
SA-PMX92 SA-PMX90
SB-PMX70 SB-PMX70
[PMX92]:
[PMX90]:
I
Í
[For_Continental_Europe,_the_United_Kingdom_and_Ireland]
Opisane procedury należy wykonywać za pomocą pilota zdalnego
sterowania. Można również użyć przycisków na panelu przednim
urządzenia, jeśli są identyczne.
Zakupione urządzenie może różnić się od przedstawionego na
ilustracjach. Niniejsza instrukcja obsługi ma zastosowanie do
następujących zestawów.
Zestaw
Urządzenie główne
Głośniki
Jeżeli nie wskazano inaczej, ilustracje w tej instrukcji przedstawiają
SC-PMX92.
wskazuje funkcje mające zastosowanie tylko dla
SC-PMX92.
wskazuje funkcje mające zastosowanie tylko dla
SC-PMX90.
Symbole umieszczone na produkcie (w tym na akcesoriach)
mają następujące znaczenie:
AC
DC
Wł.
Tryb gotowości
Sprzęt klasy II (podwójnie izolowana konstrukcja)
Konserwacja
•
•
•
Aby wyczyścić urządzenie, wytrzyj je miękką, suchą ściereczką.
Do czyszczenia urządzenia nie należy stosować alkoholu,
rozcieńczalnika ani benzyny.
Przed użyciem chusteczki nasączonej środkiem chemicznym należy
zapoznać się z dołączoną do niej instrukcją.
Środki ostrożności
OSTRZEŻENIE!
UWAGA!
Urządzenie
Urządzenie
Bateria
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Aby ograniczyć niebezpieczeństwo pożaru, porażenia prądem lub
uszkodzenia urządzenia,
Aby ograniczyć niebezpieczeństwo pożaru, porażenia prądem lub
uszkodzenia urządzenia,
Nie wolno zwierać biegunów baterii ani jej rozbierać.
Nie ładować baterii alkalicznych ani manganowych.
Nie wolno używać baterii, z których została zdjęta warstwa ochronna.
Nie zbliżać baterii do źródeł ciepła lub ognia.
Baterii nie należy pozostawiać przez dłuższy czas w pojeździe
z zamkniętymi drzwiami i oknami, narażonym na bezpośrednie
promieniowanie słoneczne.
Jeśli pilot ma nie być używany przez dłuższy czas, należy wyjąć z
niego baterię. Przechowywać w chłodnym, ciemnym miejscu.
Istnieje niebezpieczeństwo wybuchu w przypadku, gdy baterie
zostaną nieprawidłowo umieszczone. Baterie należy wymieniać
na takie same lub na baterie równorzędnego typu, zalecane przez
producenta.
W przypadku utylizacji baterii, należy się skontaktować z lokalnymi
władzami lub ze sprzedawcą celem uzyskania informacji o
prawidłowym sposobie postępowania.
Urządzenie jest przeznaczone do używania w klimacie umiarkowanym.
Wtyczka zasilania umożliwia odłączenie urządzenia.
To urządzenie może odbierać zakłócenia wywołane użyciem
telefonu komórkowego. Jeżeli takie zakłócenia wystąpią, wskazane
jest zwiększenie odległości pomiędzy urządzeniem a telefonem
komórkowym.
Urządzenie wykorzystuje promień lasera. Sterowanie, regulacje lub
postępowanie w sposób tutaj nie określony grozi niebezpiecznym
naświetleniem promieniami lasera.
Zainstaluj to urządzenie w taki sposób, aby możliwe było
natychmiastowe odłączenie wtyczki zasilania od gniazda zasilania.
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Nie należy narażać urządzenia na działanie deszczu, wilgoci,
kapanie lub zachlapanie.
Niniejszego urządzenia nie należy instalować lub umieszczać
w biblioteczce, zabudowanej szafce lub innej ograniczonej
przestrzeni. Należy zapewnić odpowiednią wentylację urządzenia.
Nie zasłaniaj otworów wentylacyjnych urządzenia gazetami,
obrusami, zasłonami i podobnymi przedmiotami.
Nie umieszczać na urządzeniu źródeł otwartego ognia, jak np.
zapalone świece.
Na urządzeniu nie należy umieszczać żadnych przedmiotów
napełnionych płynami, np. dzbanków.
Stosować wyłącznie zalecane akcesoria.
Nie zdejmować pokrywy.
Użytkownik nie powinien podejmować się naprawy urządzenia na
własną rękę. Naprawę należy zlecić w autoryzowanym punkcie
serwisowym.
Deklaracja Zgodności (DoC)
Niniejszym “Panasonic Corporation” deklaruje, iż niniejszy produkt
jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami i innymi znaczącymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 2014/53/UE.
Klienci mogą pobrać kopię oryginalnej Deklaracji Zgodności
(DoC) dla naszych produktów radiowych i końcowych urządzeń
teletransmisyjnych (RE) z naszego serwera DoC:
Panasonic Testing Centre, Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
http://www.ptc.panasonic.eu
Kontakt z autoryzowanym przedstawicielem:
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH,
Typ łączności
bezprzewodowej
Pasmo
częstotliwości
Maksymalna moc
(dBm EIRP)
Bluetooth
®
2402-2480 MHz 4 dBm
Utylizacja zużytych urządzeń elektrycznych i elektronicznych
oraz baterii
Dotyczy wyłącznie obszaru Unii Europejskiej oraz krajów
posiadających systemy zbiórki i recyklingu
Niniejsze symbole umieszczone na produktach,
opakowaniach i/lub w dołączonej dokumentacji
oznaczają, że nie należy mieszać zużytych
urządzeń elektrycznych i elektronicznych oraz
baterii z innymi odpadami domowymi/komunalnymi.
W celu zapewnienia właściwego przetwarzania,
utylizacji oraz recyklingu zużytych urządzeń
elektrycznych i elektronicznych oraz zużytych
baterii, należy oddawać je do wyznaczonych
punktów gromadzenia odpadów zgodnie z przepisami prawa
krajowego.
Poprzez prawidłowe postepowanie ze zużytymi urządzeniami
elektrycznymi i elektronicznymi oraz zużytymi bateriami pomagasz
oszczędzać cenne zasoby naturalne oraz zapobiegać potencjalnemu
negatywnemu wpływowi na zdrowie człowieka oraz na stan
środowiska naturalnego.
W celu uzyskania informacji o zbiórce oraz recyklingu zużytych
urządzeń elektrycznych i elektronicznych oraz baterii prosimy o
kontakt z władzami lokalnymi.
Za niewłaściwe pozbywanie się tych odpadów mogą grozić kary
przewidziane przepisami prawa krajowego.
(Dotyczy symbolu baterii (symbol poniżej)):
Ten symbol może występować wraz z symbolem
pierwiastka chemicznego. W takim przypadku
wymagania Dyrektywy w sprawie określonego
środka chemicznego są spełnione.
3
TQBM0358
Caution for AC Mains Lead
(For the AC mains plug of three pins)
For your safety, please read the following text carefully.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin
mains plug for your safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that
the replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it
is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark Ï
or the BSI mark Ì on the
body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must
ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until
a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your
local dealer.
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC
mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug
fitted and follow the instructions below.
Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.
1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse cover
Figure A
Fuse
(5 ampere)
Figure B
Fuse
(5 ampere)
∏ ([PMX92])
(N1CYYYY00022)
∏
([PMX90])
(RSAX0002)
Dostarczone wyposażenie
Rozmieszczenie głośników
Należy sprawdzić poszczególne elementy
dostarczonego wyposażenia.
1 x Przewód zasilania
(K2CQ2YY00107)
1 x Pilot zdalnego sterowania
(N2QAYB001101)
1 x Bateria do pilota zdalnego sterowania
1 x antena DAB
1 x wewnętrzna antena FM
2 x Kable głośnikowe
(REE1713)
•
Numery produktów w niniejszej instrukcji są aktualne w
grudniu 2018. Mogą one ulec zmianie.
Wysokotonowy
Ustaw kolumny w taki sposób, aby głośniki wysokotonowe były
skierowane do środka. W przypadku zdjęcia maskownic należy
uważać, żeby nie dotykać kopułek głośników, ponieważ może to
spowodować ich uszkodzenie.
Najlepszą jakość dźwięku można uzyskać poprzez stosowanie
zestawów głośnikowych z urządzeniem, do którego są przeznaczone.
Użycie innych zestawów głośnikowych grozi uszkodzeniem urządzenia
i pogorszeniem jakości dźwięku.
Prosimy używać tylko zestawów głośnikowych znajdujących się
w wyposażeniu.
Uwaga:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Aby zapewnić odpowiednią wentylację, należy zachować
przynajmniej 10 mm odstępu między głośnikami a urządzeniem
głównym.
Zestawy głośnikowe należy ustawić na płaskim, stabilnym podłożu.
Niniejsze zestawy głośnikowe nie mają ekranu magnetycznego.
Nie należy ich umieszczać w pobliżu odbiorników telewizyjnych,
komputerów ani innych urządzeń wrażliwych na oddziaływanie pola
magnetycznego.
Długotrwałe odtwarzanie przy dużym poziomie głośności może
spowodować uszkodzenie systemu i skrócić jego żywotność.
Aby uniknąć uszkodzenia urządzenia, należy zmniejszyć głośność w
następujących przypadkach:
Podczas odtwarzania zniekształconych dźwięków.
Podczas regulacji brzmienia dźwięku.
−
−
UWAGA!
Zestawów głośnikowych należy używać wyłącznie z
zalecanym systemem. W przeciwnym wypadku może dojść
do uszkodzenia wzmacniacza, zestawów głośnikowych i
do pożaru. W przypadku uszkodzenia urządzenia lub nagłej
zmiany w jakości odtwarzania należy zwrócić się po radę do
wykwalikowanego specjalisty.
W celu podłączenia zestawów głośnikowych należy
zastosować procedury opisane w niniejszej instrukcji.
TQBM0358
4
[PMX92]
[PMX90]
[PMX90]
22
1
22
11
[PMX92]
i:
j:
Left speaker (rear)
OPTICAL OUT
Podłączenie
Nie należy podłączać przewodu zasilania przed zakończeniem
ustalania wszystkich innych połączeń.
Do domowego gniazdka
sieciowego
Do domowego gniazdka
sieciowego
1
Podłącz antenę
Umieść antenę w miejscu najlepszego odbioru
Taśma klejąca
(nie należy do
wyposażenia)
Taśma klejąca
(nie należy do
wyposażenia)
Pamiętaj, aby dokręcić
nakrętkę
Jeżeli odbiór sygnałów radiowych jest słaby, użyj zewnętrznej
anteny (nie należy do wyposażenia).
•
2
3
Podłącz głośniki
Oszczędzanie energii
Podłącz przewód zasilania.
Urządzenie główne (tył)
Miedziane
Srebrne
Do prawego
głośnika (tył)
Nie stosować przewodów zasilania pochodzących z innych urządzeń.
System pobiera niewielką ilość energii ( 13), nawet w trybie
gotowości. Gdy system nie jest używany, należy odłączyć go od
zasilania.
Można podłączyć odtwarzacz DVD, przenośny odtwarzacz audio itp.
Uważaj, aby nie krzyżować (zwierać) lub odwracać
polaryzacji przewodów głośnikowych, gdyż można w ten
sposób uszkodzić głośniki.
Podłączanie innych urządzeń
Uwaga:
Przed podłączeniem urządzenia należy odłączyć przewód zasilania.
Wyłącz cały sprzęt i przeczytaj odpowiednie instrukcje obsługi.
Podzespoły i przewody są sprzedawane oddzielnie.
Aby podłączyć urządzenia innego typu niż opisane w tej instrukcji,
skonsultuj się ze sprzedawcą.
W przypadku korzystania z przejściówek, może dojść do
zniekształcenia dźwięku.
Podczas odtwarzania zawartości wideo z wykorzystaniem tej funkcji,
obraz i dźwięk mogą nie być zsynchronizowane.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Podłączanie do gniazda AUDIO IN
Podłączanie do gniazda OPT IN (optyczne
wejście audio)
Podłączanie do gniazda AUX IN
Urządzenie główne (tył)
Urządzenie główne (tył)
Urządzenie główne (tył)
Np. odtwarzacz DVD
Np. odtwarzacz DVD
Np. odtwarzacz DVD
(nie należy do
wyposażenia)
(nie należy do
wyposażenia)
(nie należy do
wyposażenia)
Przewód audio (nie należy do wyposażenia)
Optyczny kabel cyfrowy audio (nie należy do wyposażenia)
Analogowy kabel audio (∅ 3,5 mm)
(nie należy do wyposażenia)
Cyfrowe wejście audio niniejszego urządzenia może wykryć tylko
następujące liniowe sygnały PCM (LPCM). Szczegółowe informacje
znajdują się w instrukcji obsługi podłączonego urządzenia.
Po podłączeniu do gniazda AUX IN można dostosować poziom
wejścia itp. Szczegółowe informacje znajdują się w “Wejście AUX
IN” ( 11).
•
•
Częstotliwość próbkowania: 32, 44,1, 48, 88,2, 96 kHz
Liczba bitów kwantyzacji: 16/24 bitów
−
−
5
TQBM0358
OPEN/CLOSE
VOLUME
SELECTOR
PAIRING
BASS
TREBLE
EXT-IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5 V 1.5 A
CD/USB
RADIO
DIMMER
6
4
1
20
21
22
23
19
11
5
17
18
“DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) ------. “FM” ------. “AUDIO IN”
^
------ “PC”
(
-
“OPT”
(
-
“AUX”
(
---
b
“CD”
--. “BLUETOOTH” --. “DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) --. “FM”
:;
“PC”
(
-- “USB”
(
--
“OPT”
(
-- “AUX”
(
--
“AUDIO IN”
R6/LR6, AA
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
12
Przełącznik gotowości/włączania [
5
TQBM0358
Overview of controls
1 Standby/on switch [Í], [Í/I]
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or
vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
2 Numeric buttons [1 to 9, 0, S10]
• To select a 2-digit number
Example: 16: [S10]
> [1] > [6]
• To select a 3-digit number
Example: 124: [S10]
> [S10] >[1] > [2]> [4]
3 Delete a programmed track
4 Select audio source
5 Basic playback control
6 Select the sound effects
7 Set the play menu item
8 View content information
9 Clock and timer operation
10 Set the programme function
11 Adjust the volume of the system
12 Mute the sound of the system
Press the button again to cancel.
“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the
volume or when you switch off the system.
13 Enter setup menu
14 Set the radio menu item
15 Select the option
16 Dim the display panel
Press the button again to cancel.
17 Display panel
18 Port for USB devices
19 Bluetooth
®
-pairing button
• Press to select “BLUETOOTH” as the audio source.
• Press and hold to enter pairing mode (> 6) or
disconnect a Bluetooth
®
device (> 7).
20 Open or close the disc tray
21 Headphones jack ( )
• Plug type: 3.5 mm stereo (not supplied)
• Avoid listening for prolonged periods of time to prevent
hearing damage.
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
• Listening at full volume for long periods may damage
the user’s ears.
22 Disc tray
• Do not put any object in front of the disc tray.
23 Remote control sensor
Preparing the remote control
• Use alkaline or manganese battery.
• Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with
those in the remote control.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor,
away from obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m
directly in front of the main unit, within an angle of
approximately 30° to the left and right.
OPEN/CLOSE
VOLUME
SELECTOR
PAIRING
BASS
TREBLE
EXT-IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5 V 1.5 A
CD/USB
RADIO
DIMMER
6
4
1
20
21
22
23
19
11
5
17
18
On the remote control
[ ]: “BLUETOOTH”
[CD/USB]: “CD”
(
. “USB”
[RADIO, EXT-IN]:
“DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) ------. “FM” ------. “AUDIO IN”
^
------ “PC”
(
-
“OPT”
(
-
“AUX”
(
---
b
On the main unit
[SELECTOR]:
“CD”
--. “BLUETOOTH” --. “DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) --. “FM”
:;
“PC”
(
-- “USB”
(
--
“OPT”
(
-- “AUX”
(
--
“AUDIO IN”
R6/LR6, AA
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 5 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], [
5
TQBM0358
Overview of controls
1 Standby/on switch [Í], [Í/I]
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or
vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
2 Numeric buttons [1 to 9, 0, S10]
• To select a 2-digit number
Example: 16: [S10]
> [1] > [6]
• To select a 3-digit number
Example: 124: [S10]
> [S10] >[1] > [2]> [4]
3 Delete a programmed track
4 Select audio source
5 Basic playback control
6 Select the sound effects
7 Set the play menu item
8 View content information
9 Clock and timer operation
10 Set the programme function
11 Adjust the volume of the system
12 Mute the sound of the system
Press the button again to cancel.
“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the
volume or when you switch off the system.
13 Enter setup menu
14 Set the radio menu item
15 Select the option
16 Dim the display panel
Press the button again to cancel.
17 Display panel
18 Port for USB devices
19 Bluetooth
®
-pairing button
• Press to select “BLUETOOTH” as the audio source.
• Press and hold to enter pairing mode (> 6) or
disconnect a Bluetooth
®
device (> 7).
20 Open or close the disc tray
21 Headphones jack ( )
• Plug type: 3.5 mm stereo (not supplied)
• Avoid listening for prolonged periods of time to prevent
hearing damage.
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
• Listening at full volume for long periods may damage
the user’s ears.
22 Disc tray
• Do not put any object in front of the disc tray.
23 Remote control sensor
Preparing the remote control
• Use alkaline or manganese battery.
• Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with
those in the remote control.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor,
away from obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m
directly in front of the main unit, within an angle of
approximately 30° to the left and right.
OPEN/CLOSE
VOLUME
SELECTOR
PAIRING
BASS
TREBLE
EXT-IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5 V 1.5 A
CD/USB
RADIO
DIMMER
6
4
1
20
21
22
23
19
11
5
17
18
On the remote control
[ ]: “BLUETOOTH”
[CD/USB]: “CD”
(
. “USB”
[RADIO, EXT-IN]:
“DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) ------. “FM” ------. “AUDIO IN”
^
------ “PC”
(
-
“OPT”
(
-
“AUX”
(
---
b
On the main unit
[SELECTOR]:
“CD”
--. “BLUETOOTH” --. “DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) --. “FM”
:;
“PC”
(
-- “USB”
(
--
“OPT”
(
-- “AUX”
(
--
“AUDIO IN”
R6/LR6, AA
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 5 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
/I]
Wybór źródła dźwięku
Przyciski numeryczne[1 do 9, 0,
10]
Usuwanie zaprogramowanej ścieżki
Podstawowe elementy sterowania odtwarzaniem
Wybór charakterystyki dźwięku
Ustawienia elementów menu odtwarzania
Wyświetlanie zawartości
Funkcja zegara lub timera
Ustawianie funkcji programu
Regulacja głośności systemu
Wyświetlanie menu ustawień
Ustawienia elementów menu radia
Ponownie naciśnij przycisk, aby anulować wybór.
“MUTE” można wyłączyć również przez regulowanie głośności
lub wyłączając system.
Wyciszanie dźwięku
Na pilocie zdalnego sterowania
[
5
TQBM0358
Overview of controls
1 Standby/on switch [Í], [Í/I]
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or
vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
2 Numeric buttons [1 to 9, 0, S10]
• To select a 2-digit number
Example: 16: [S10]
> [1] > [6]
• To select a 3-digit number
Example: 124: [S10]
> [S10] >[1] > [2]> [4]
3 Delete a programmed track
4 Select audio source
5 Basic playback control
6 Select the sound effects
7 Set the play menu item
8 View content information
9 Clock and timer operation
10 Set the programme function
11 Adjust the volume of the system
12 Mute the sound of the system
Press the button again to cancel.
“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the
volume or when you switch off the system.
13 Enter setup menu
14 Set the radio menu item
15 Select the option
16 Dim the display panel
Press the button again to cancel.
17 Display panel
18 Port for USB devices
19 Bluetooth
®
-pairing button
• Press to select “BLUETOOTH” as the audio source.
• Press and hold to enter pairing mode (> 6) or
disconnect a Bluetooth
®
device (> 7).
20 Open or close the disc tray
21 Headphones jack ( )
• Plug type: 3.5 mm stereo (not supplied)
• Avoid listening for prolonged periods of time to prevent
hearing damage.
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
• Listening at full volume for long periods may damage
the user’s ears.
22 Disc tray
• Do not put any object in front of the disc tray.
23 Remote control sensor
Preparing the remote control
• Use alkaline or manganese battery.
• Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with
those in the remote control.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor,
away from obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m
directly in front of the main unit, within an angle of
approximately 30° to the left and right.
OPEN/CLOSE
VOLUME
SELECTOR
PAIRING
BASS
TREBLE
EXT-IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5 V 1.5 A
CD/USB
RADIO
DIMMER
6
4
1
20
21
22
23
19
11
5
17
18
On the remote control
[ ]: “BLUETOOTH”
[CD/USB]: “CD”
(
. “USB”
[RADIO, EXT-IN]:
“DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) ------. “FM” ------. “AUDIO IN”
^
------ “PC”
(
-
“OPT”
(
-
“AUX”
(
---
b
On the main unit
[SELECTOR]:
“CD”
--. “BLUETOOTH” --. “DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) --. “FM”
:;
“PC”
(
-- “USB”
(
--
“OPT”
(
-- “AUX”
(
--
“AUDIO IN”
R6/LR6, AA
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 5 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
]:“BLUETOOTH”
[CD/USB]:“CD”(.“USB”
[RADIO,EXT-IN]:
Na urządzeniu głównym
[SELECTOR]:
Opis elementów sterowania
Naciśnij ten przycisk, aby wyłączyć urządzenie (przełączyć je w
stan gotowości) lub włączyć je z powrotem. W stanie gotowości
urządzenie nadal pobiera niewielką moc.
Aby wybrać 2-cyfrowy numer
Przykład:16:[10] → [1] → [6]
Aby wybrać 3-cyfrowy numer
Przykład:124:[10] → [10] → [1] → [2] → [4]
•
•
15
17
18
19
20
22
23
21
16
Wybór opcji
Wyświetlacz
Port urządzeń USB
Bluetooth
®
- przycisk parowania
Otwieranie lub zamykanie kieszeni napędu płyt
Kieszeń napędu płyt
Czujnik zdalnego sterowania
Gniazdo słuchawek(
5
TQBM0358
Overview of controls
1 Standby/on switch [Í], [Í/I]
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or
vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
2 Numeric buttons [1 to 9, 0, S10]
• To select a 2-digit number
Example: 16: [S10]
> [1] > [6]
• To select a 3-digit number
Example: 124: [S10]
> [S10] >[1] > [2]> [4]
3 Delete a programmed track
4 Select audio source
5 Basic playback control
6 Select the sound effects
7 Set the play menu item
8 View content information
9 Clock and timer operation
10 Set the programme function
11 Adjust the volume of the system
12 Mute the sound of the system
Press the button again to cancel.
“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the
volume or when you switch off the system.
13 Enter setup menu
14 Set the radio menu item
15 Select the option
16 Dim the display panel
Press the button again to cancel.
17 Display panel
18 Port for USB devices
19 Bluetooth
®
-pairing button
• Press to select “BLUETOOTH” as the audio source.
• Press and hold to enter pairing mode (> 6) or
disconnect a Bluetooth
®
device (> 7).
20 Open or close the disc tray
21 Headphones jack ( )
• Plug type: 3.5 mm stereo (not supplied)
• Avoid listening for prolonged periods of time to prevent
hearing damage.
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
• Listening at full volume for long periods may damage
the user’s ears.
22 Disc tray
• Do not put any object in front of the disc tray.
23 Remote control sensor
Preparing the remote control
• Use alkaline or manganese battery.
• Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with
those in the remote control.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor,
away from obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m
directly in front of the main unit, within an angle of
approximately 30° to the left and right.
OPEN/CLOSE
VOLUME
SELECTOR
PAIRING
BASS
TREBLE
EXT-IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5 V 1.5 A
CD/USB
RADIO
DIMMER
6
4
1
20
21
22
23
19
11
5
17
18
On the remote control
[ ]: “BLUETOOTH”
[CD/USB]: “CD”
(
. “USB”
[RADIO, EXT-IN]:
“DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) ------. “FM” ------. “AUDIO IN”
^
------ “PC”
(
-
“OPT”
(
-
“AUX”
(
---
b
On the main unit
[SELECTOR]:
“CD”
--. “BLUETOOTH” --. “DAB+” (
[PMX92]
) --. “FM”
:;
“PC”
(
-- “USB”
(
--
“OPT”
(
-- “AUX”
(
--
“AUDIO IN”
R6/LR6, AA
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 5 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
)
Przyciemnianie panelu wyświetlacza
Ponownie naciśnij przycisk, aby anulować wybór.
Naciśnij, aby wybrać “BLUETOOTH” jako źródło dźwięku.
Typ wtyku: średnica 3,5 mm, stereo (nie należy do wyposażenia)
Należy unikać długotrwałego słuchania, aby zapobiec
uszkodzeniu słuchu.
Nadmierne ciśnienie akustyczne dźwięku wydobywającego się
ze słuchawek czy słuchawek nagłownych może powodować
utratę słuchu.
Głośne słuchanie przez dłuższy czas może doprowadzić do
uszkodzeń w uchu wewnętrznym.
Nie należy umieszczać żadnych przedmiotów przed tacą na płytę.
Należy stosować baterie alkaliczne lub manganowe.
Załóż baterię tak, aby jej bieguny (+ i –) były zgodne z oznaczeniami
wewnątrz obudowy pilota zdalnego sterowania.
Ustaw pilota w kierunku czujnika zdalnego sterowania, tak aby nie
było między nimi żadnych przeszkód, w odległości nie większej niż
7 m od przedniej strony urządzenia, pod kątem do ok. 30° w lewo
lub prawo
Naciśnij i przytrzymaj, aby wejść do trybu parowania ( 6)
lub rozłączyć urządzenie Bluetooth
®
( 7).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Przygotowanie pilota zdalnego
sterowania
TQBM0358
6
Informacje o Bluetooth
®
Odtwarzanie przez Bluetooth
®
Uwaga:
Przygotowanie
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Przygotowanie
MODE 1:
MODE 2:
Połączenie poprzez menu Bluetooth
®
Tryb transmisji Bluetooth
®
Poziom sygnału wejściowego Bluetooth
®
Parowanie z urządzeniami Bluetooth
®
Podłączanie sparowanego urządzenie Bluetooth
®
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby wybrać“BLUETOOTH”.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [PLAY MENU], aby wybrać “LINK
MODE”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać tryb, a następnie naciśnij
[OK].
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [PLAY MENU], aby wybrać “INPUT
LEVEL”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać poziom, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “BLUETOOTH”.
Rozpocznij odtwarzanie na urządzeniu Bluetooth
®
.
Wybierz“SC-PMX92”lub“SC-PMX90”z menu
Bluetooth
®
urządzenia Bluetooth
®
.
Naciśnij [PLAY MENU], aby wybrać “PAIRING”, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
Wybierz“SC-PMX92”lub“SC-PMX90”z menu
Bluetooth
®
urządzenia Bluetooth
®
.
Rozpocznij odtwarzanie na urządzeniu Bluetooth
®
.
Stosowane pasmo częstotliwości
Ograniczenia użytkowania
Przygotowanie
Zasięg stosowania
Zakłócenia powodowane przez inne urządzenia
Przeznaczenie
Certykacja tego urządzenia
Firma Panasonic nie ponosi odpowiedzialności za narażenie
danych na zagrożenia podczas transmisji bezprzewodowej.
Za pomocą połączenia Bluetooth
®
możesz bezprzewodowo
odtwarzać dźwięk Bluetooth
®
z urządzenia audio z użyciem tego
systemu.
Więcej informacji znajduje się w Instrukcji obsługi
urządzenia Bluetooth
®
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System wykorzystuje pasmo częstotliwości 2,4 GHz.
Zestaw podlega ograniczeniom dotyczącym częstotliwości i ma
odpowiedni certykat wydany na podstawie odpowiednich przepisów.
Nie ma więc konieczności uzyskiwania pozwolenia na transmisję
bezprzewodową.
Poniższe działania są ścigane przez prawo w niektórych krajach:
Włącz funkcję Bluetooth
®
w urządzeniu i umieść urządzenie w
pobliżu tego zestawu.
Jeżeli na wyświetlaczy wyświetlone jest “PAIRING”, przejdź
do kroku 3.
Ewentualnie naciśnij i przytrzymaj [
-PAIRING] na urządzeniu.
Adres MAC (np. alfanumeryczny ciąg unikalny dla każdego
zestawu) może wyświetlić się, zanim pojawi się nazwa
urządzenia głównego.
Nazwa połączonego urządzenia wyświetlana jest na ekranie
przez kilka sekund..
Jeżeli wyświetli się komunikat proszący o klucz, wprowadź “0000”.
Do zestawu można podłączać tylko jedno urządzenie jednocześnie.
Możesz zmienić tryb transmisji, aby ustawić priorytet jakości
transmisji lub jakości dźwięku.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “BLUETOOTH”.
Wybierz “MODE 1”, jeżeli dźwięk jest przerywany.
Ustawienie fabryczne to “MODE 2”.
Podłącz urządzenie Bluetooth
®
.
Wybierz “LEVEL 0”, jeżeli dźwięk jest zniekształcony.
Ustawienie fabryczne to “LEVEL 0”.
Podczas odtwarzania zawartości wideo z wykorzystaniem tej funkcji,
obraz i dźwięk mogą nie być zsynchronizowane. W takim przypadku
należy wybrać “MODE 1”.
Jeżeli poziom sygnału wyjściowego transmisji z urządzenia Bluetooth
®
jest zbyt niski, zmień ustawienie poziomu sygnału wejściowego.
Jeżeli urządzenie Bluetooth
®
jest już podłączone, rozłącz je.
Nacisk na jakość połączenia
Nacisk na jakość dźwięku
Kiedy “BLUETOOTH” wybrane jest jako źródło, niniejsze
urządzenie automatycznie spróbuje połączyć się z ostatnio
podłączonym urządzeniem Bluetooth
®
. (Na wyświetlaczu podczas
tego procesu wyświetlane jest “LINKING”) W razie niepowodzenia
spróbuj nawiązać połączenie ponownie.
Można zarejestrować maksymalnie 8 urządzeń w tym zestawie. W
przypadku sparowania dziewiątego urządzenia, urządzenie, które
było najdłużej nieużywane, zostanie zastąpione.
Nazwa połączonego urządzenia wyświetlana jest na ekranie
przez kilka sekund.
“READY” jest wyświetlone na wyświetlaczu.
Nie gwarantuje się możliwości transmisji bezprzewodowej i/lub
stosowania ze wszystkimi urządzeniami z technologią Bluetooth
®
.
Wszystkie urządzenia muszą być zgodne z normami określonymi
przez Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
W zależności od specykacji i ustawień urządzenia, podłączenie
może nie być możliwe lub niektóre operacje mogą się różnić.
Zestaw obsługuje technologię bezpieczeństwa Bluetooth
®
.
Jednak w zależności od środowiska, w którym działa, oraz/ lub
ustawień, bezpieczeństwo to może nie być wystarczające. Podczas
bezprzewodowej transmisji danych do zestawu należy zachować
ostrożność.
Zestaw nie może przesyłać danych do urządzenia Bluetooth
®
.
Używaj urządzenia w odległości maksymalnie 10 m.
Zasięg może się zmniejszyć w zależności od otoczenia, przeszkód
lub zakłóceń.
System może nie działać prawidłowo, jeżeli fale radiowe emitowane
przez pobliską stację nadawczą itp. są zbyt silne.
System przeznaczony jest do użytku ogólnego.
Nie należy używać tego zestawu w pobliżu urządzeń lub w
środowisku wrażliwym na zakłócenia radiowe (np. lotniska, szpitale,
laboratoria itp.).
W wyniku zakłóceń powodowanych przez inne urządzenie
Bluetooth
®
lub urządzenia, które korzystają z pasma częstotliwości
2,4 GHz, znajdujące się w pobliżu systemu, system może nie
działać prawidłowo i mogą wystąpić problemy takie jak hałas oraz
przeskakiwanie dźwięku.
Rozkładanie na części lub modykacja systemu.
Usuwanie informacji dotyczących specykacji.
-
-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
3
3
4
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,.
“LEVEL
i
1”
,.
“LEVEL
i
2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
7
TQBM0358
5 V 1.5 A
Odłączanie urządzenia Bluetooth
®
Informacje o nośnikach
Umieszczanie nośników
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [CD/USB], aby wybrać “CD”.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [CD/USB], aby wybrać “USB”.
Obsługiwane urządzenia USB
CD
Urządzenie USB
Obsługiwane płyty CD
Gotowość Bluetooth
®
Kiedy urządzenie Bluetooth
®
jest podłączone:
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [PLAY MENU], aby wybrać
“DISCONNECT?”.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [SETUP], aby wybrać
“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “OK? YES”, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “ON”, a następnie
naciśnij [OK].
1
1
2
2
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Można również odłączyć urządzenie Bluetooth
®
naciskając i
przytrzymując przycisk [
-PAIRING ] na urządzeniu głównym.
Należy mieć na uwadze, że rma Panasonic nie ponosi
odpowiedzialności za utratę danych.
To urządzenie nie gwarantuje połączenia ze wszystkimi
urządzeniami USB.
Obsługiwane systemy plików to FAT12, FAT16 i FAT32.
Urządzenie obsługuje specykację USB 2.0 High Speed.
Urządzenia USB o pojemności przekraczającej 32 GB mogą nie
działać w niektórych warunkach.
W zależności od tego, w jaki sposób zostały utworzone pliki, mogą
one nie być odtwarzane w kolejności, w jakiej zostały ponumerowane
lub mogą w ogóle nie być odtwarzane.
Pliki są zdeniowane jako utwory, a foldery są zdeniowane jako
albumy.
Obsługiwane formaty i rozszerzenia:
Urządzenie może odtwarzać do:
Wyjmuj płyty CD tylko kiedy przestaną się obracać.
Włóż urządzenie USB bezpośrednio do gniazda USB.
Nieużywaj kabla przedłużającego USB.
Po zakończeniu używania urządzenia USB należy je odłączyć.
Przed wyjęciem urządzenia USB wybierz źródło inne niż “USB”.
System odtwarza płyty zgodne z formatem CD-DA.
Niniejsze urządzenie nie odtwarza plików nagranych w trybie zapisu
pakietowego.
Urządzenie może odtwarzać do:
Płyty muszą być zgodne z normą ISO9660 level 1 lub 2 (z wyjątkiem
formatów z rozszerzeniem).
Niektóre płyty CD-R/RW mogą nie być odtwarzane z powodu złego
stanu nagrania.
Pliki MP3 są zdeniowane jako utwory, a foldery są zdeniowane
jako albumy.
Nagrania nie zawsze odtwarzane są w kolejności nagrywania.
System pozwala na odtwarzanie plików w formacie CD-DA lub MP3
z nośników CD-R/RW.
Urządzenie może nie odtwarzać niektórych płyt ze względu
na ich stan.
Przed rozpoczęciem odtwarzania należy snalizować płytę w
urządzeniu, na którym została nagrana
Jeżeli na płycie zamieszczono materiały zarówno w formacie MP3,
jak i w normalnym formacie audio (CD-DA), urządzenie odtwarza
materiał nagrany na wewnętrznej części płyty.
Aby wyłączyć funkcję, wybierz “OFF” w kroku 2.
Ustawienie fabryczne to “OFF”. Gdy ta funkcja jest ustawiona na
“ON”, zużycie energii w trybie gotowości wzrośnie.
Nazwa marki Bluetooth
®
i logotypy są zarejestrowanymi znakami
towarowymi rmy Bluetooth SIG, Inc. i wszelkie ich użycie przez
rmę Panasonic Corporation jest objęte licencją. Pozostałe znaki
towarowe i nazwy handlowe są własnością ich posiadaczy.
Urządzenie Bluetooth
®
zostanie rozłączone, jeżeli wybrane
zostanie inne źródło audio (np. “CD”).
Jeżeli wybrano“SC-PMX92” lub “SC-PMX90” z menu Bluetooth
®
sparowanego urządzenia Bluetooth
®
, urządzenie główne
automatycznie włączy się z trybu gotowości i nawiąże połączenie
Bluetooth
®
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
800 albumów (włącznie z folderem nadrzędnym)
CD-DA: 99 utworów
MP3: 999 utworów, 255 albumów (łącznie z folderem głównym)
8000 utworów
999 utworów w jednym albumie
-
-
-
-
-
Etykietą do góry
OPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE
TQBM0358
8
Przyciski odtwarzania z nośników
Przeglądanie dostępnych informacji
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Przygotowanie
Odtwarzanie
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [DISPLAY].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
].
położenie jest zapamiętywane i
wyświetlane jest “RESUME”.
Naciśnij dwukrotnie [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby
całkowicie zatrzymać odtwarzanie.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby pominąć utwór.
Podczas odtwarzania lub po
Maksymalna liczba możliwych do wyświetlenia znaków: około 32
Podczas odtwarzania w losowej kolejności nie można przejść
do utworów poprzednio odtworzonych lub używaćprzycisków
numerycznych.
Ta funkcja trybu odtwarzania nie działa z włączoną opcją
“Programowanie odtwarzania”.
Po wysunięciu tacki płyty lub wyjęciu nośnika USB tryb zostaje
anulowany.
Ta funkcja pozwala zaprogramować do 24 utworów.
“PROGRAM” zostaje wyświetlone na kilka sekund.
Aby zaprogramować nowe utwory należy powtórzyć
kroki od 2 do 4.
“PROGRAM” zostaje wyświetlone na kilka sekund.
Aby zaprogramować nowe utwory, należy powtórzyć ten krok.
System obsługuje znaczniki ID3 w wersji 1 i 2.
Anulowanie ustawienia trybu odtwarzania.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] w
trybie zatrzymania.
Naciśnij [DEL] w trybie
zatrzymanym.
Naciśnij [PROGRAM] w trybie
zatrzymanym.
Po wysunięciu tacki płyty lub wyjęciu nośnika USB pamięć
programu zostaje skasowana.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] w trybie zatrzymania.
Wyświetlane jest “CLEAR ALL”.
W ciągu 5 sekund naciśnij
ponownie [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
].
Odtwarzanie tylko wybranej ścieżki.
Odtwarzanie tylko wybranego album MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD.
Losowe odtwarzanie zawartości.
Włączanie trybu powtarzania.
Wyłączanie trybu powtarzania.
Losowe odtwarzanie ścieżek zwybranego album
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać
album
MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD.
Wyświetli się “1”, “
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”.
Wyświetli się “1”, “
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”
Wyświetli się “RND”
Wyświetli się “1”, “
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”, “RND”
“PGM OFF” zostaje wyświetlone na
kilka sekund.
Wyświetli się “
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać album MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD.
(Przechodzenie do żądanej ścieżki.)
Dane tekstowe nieobsługiwane przez system mogą być
wyświetlane odmiennie.
naciśnięciu pauzy, naciśnij i
przytrzymaj [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
]. (urządzenie
główne: [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
])
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby
pominąć album MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD.
(urządzenie główne: [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub
[
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
])
Naciśnij ponownie, aby kontynuować odtwarzanie.
Zatrzymanie
Pauza
Pomijanie
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Sprawdzanie
zawartość
programu
Usuwanie ostatniego
zaprogramowanego
Utworu
Anulowanie
odtwarzania
zaprogramowanych
utworów
Usuwanie wszystkich
zaprogramowanych
utworów
1-TRACK
1-ALBUM
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
RANDOM
REPEAT
ONREPEAT
OFFREPEAT
Szukanie
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Poniższe oznaczenia wskazują dostępność funkcji.
Płyty CD audio w formacie CD-DA lub płyty CD
zawierające pliki MP3
Można wyświetlić utwór, artystę, nazwę albumu, typ pliku, częstotliwość
próbkowania oraz inne informacje. (Informacje zależą od źródła dźwięku.)
Urządzenia USB zawierające pliki MP3/ AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD
Podłączone urządzenie Bluetooth
®
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Włącz urządzenie.
Umieść nośnik lub podłącz urządzenie Bluetooth
®
.
Naciśnij [CD/USB] lub [
TQBM0358
6
About Bluetooth
®
Frequency band used
• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
Certification of this device
• This system conforms to frequency restrictions and
has received certification based on frequency laws.
Thus, a wireless permit is not necessary.
• The actions below are punishable by law in some
countries:
- Taking apart or modifying this system.
- Removing specification indications.
Restrictions of use
• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth
®
equipped devices is not guaranteed.
• All devices must conform to standards set by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
• Depending on the specifications and settings of a
device, it can fail to connect or some operations can be
different.
• This system supports Bluetooth
®
security features. But
depending on the operating environment and/or
settings, this security is possibly not sufficient.
Transmit data wirelessly to this system with caution.
• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth
®
device.
Range of use
• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.
The range can decrease depending on the
environment, obstacles or interference.
Interference from other devices
• This system may not function properly and troubles
such as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio
wave interference if this system is located too close to
other Bluetooth
®
devices or the devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.
• This system may not function properly if radio waves
from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.
Intended usage
• This system is for normal, general use only.
• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an
environment that is sensitive to radio frequency
interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,
etc).
Bluetooth
®
operations
By using the Bluetooth
®
connection, you can listen to the
sound from the Bluetooth
®
audio device from this system
wirelessly.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the Bluetooth
®
device for details.
Preparation
• Turn on the Bluetooth
®
feature of the device and place
the device near this unit.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
If “PAIRING” is indicated on the display, go to step 3.
2 Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and
then press [OK].
Alternatively, press and hold
[ -PAIRING] on the
unit.
3 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The MAC address (e.g., alpha-numerical string that
is unique to each set) may be displayed before this
unit is displayed.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
“READY” is indicated on the display.
2 Select “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90” from the
Bluetooth
®
device’s Bluetooth
®
menu.
The name of the connected device is indicated on
the display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the Bluetooth
®
device.
Note:
• If prompted for the passkey, input “0000”.
• You can register up to 8 devices with this unit. If a 9th
device is paired, the device that has not been used for the
longest will be replaced.
• This unit can only be connected to one device at a time.
• When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this unit
will automatically try and connect to the last connected
Bluetooth
®
device. (“LINKING” is indicated on the display
during this process.) If the connection attempt fails, try to
establish a connection again.
You can change the transmission mode to prioritise
transmission quality or sound quality.
Preparation
• Press [ ] to select “BLUETOOTH”.
• If a Bluetooth
®
device is already connected, disconnect
it.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select
“LINK MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the mode and then press
[OK].
MODE 1: Emphasis on connectivity
MODE 2: Emphasis on sound quality
Note:
• Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.
• When enjoying video contents with this function, the video
and audio output may not be synchronised. In this case,
select “MODE 1”.
• The factory default is “MODE 2”.
If the sound input level from the Bluetooth
®
device is too
low, change the input level setting.
Preparation
• Connect a Bluetooth
®
device.
1 Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “INPUT
LEVEL”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the level and then press
[OK].
“LEVEL 0”
,. “LEVEL i1” ,. “LEVEL i2”
^---------------------------------------------J
Note:
• Select “LEVEL 0” if the sound is distorted.
• The factory default is “LEVEL 0”.
Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or
information that is compromised during a
wireless transmission.
Connecting via Bluetooth
®
menu
Pairing with Bluetooth
®
devices
Connecting a paired Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
transmission mode
Bluetooth
®
input level
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 6 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać źródło dźwięku.
W czasie przeszukiwania nie będzie wydawany dźwięk podczas
odtwarzania plików DSD ze źródła USB
Aby skorzystać z funkcji zdalnej kontroli urządzenia Bluetooth
®
,
urządzenie Bluetooth
®
musi obsługiwać AVRCP (Prol zdalnego
sterowania Audio Video).
W zależności od stanu urządzenia, obsługa niektórych przycisków
może nie być możliwa.
Wyboru utworów można dokonywać poprzez
naciskanie przycisków numerycznych.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Podstawowe przyciski
Menu odtwarzania
Programowanie odtwarzania
CD
CD
USB
USB
n.p
(MP3)
(MP3)
“A”: Numer album
“T”: Numer utworu
(“ ” oznacza numer).
“
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”: Album “
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”: Ścieżka
Naciśnij [PLAY MENU], aby wybrać “PLAYMODE”
lub “REPEAT”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać ustawienie, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [PROGRAM] w trybie zatrzymanym.
Naciśnij [PROGRAM] w trybie zatrzymanym.
Naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby rozpocząć odtwarzanie.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać album.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], następnie za pomocą odpowiednich
przycisków numerycznych wybierz żądany utwór.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby rozpocząć odtwarzanie.
Za pomocą odpowiednich przycisków numerycznych
wybierz żądany utwór.
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
2
(CD-DA))
9
TQBM0358
Radio FM
Przygotowanie
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO, EXT-IN], aby wybrać “FM”.
Można zaprogramować 30 stacji FM.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [DISPLAY], aby wybrać “FM STATUS”.
Aby znaleźć najlepszą pozycję anteny, użyj manualnego
skanowania aby wyszukać wybraną DAB/DAB+.
Można zaprogramować do 20 stacji DAB/DAB+.
“FM ST”:    Odbierany jest sygnał FM stereo.
“FM - - - -”:   Sygnał nie jest odbierany lub sygnał FM jest słaby lub
w trybie mono.
“FM MONO”: Należy ustawić “FM MODE” na “MONO”. ( 11, “Jeśli
słychać nadmierny szum podczas odbioru FM.”)
Automatyczne programowanie
Wyświetlanie aktualnego stanu sygnału FM
Ręczne skanowanie DAB/DAB+
Ręczne skanowanie i programowanie
Odbiór RDS
Programowanie
Wybieranie zaprogramowanej stacji
Automatyczne skanowanie DAB/DAB+
DAB/DAB+
Wybór zaprogramowanej stacji
Naciśnij [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać “A.PRESET”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby dostroić radio do żądanej stacji.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [DISPLAY].
Przygotowanie
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO, EXT-IN], aby wybrać “DAB+”.
“PS”: Nazwa stacji
“PTY”: Typ programu
“FREQ”: Częstotliwość
Naciskaj przyciski numeryczne, [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby wybrać
zaprogramowaną stację.
Naciśnij [PROGRAM].
Wybierz żądaną zaprogramowaną stację przyciskiem
numerycznym.
Naciśnij [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać “AUTOSCAN” i
naciśnij [OK].
Użyj przycisków numerycznych [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać
zaprogramowaną stację.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać
“MANUAL SCAN”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby wybrać stację.
Naciśnij [PROGRAM].
Użyj przycisków numerycznych, aby wybrać
zaprogramowany numer.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać pasmo częstotliwości do
skanowania i naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [OK].
Aby zaprogramować więcej stacji, wykonaj ponownie kroki
od 1 do 3. Nowa stacja zastąpi wcześniej zaprogramowaną
znajdującą się pod tym samym numerem.
Naciśnij [OK], aby rozpocząć programowanie.
LOWEST:
CURRENT:
2 Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “LOWEST” (najniższą) lub
“CURRENT” (aktualną) częstotliwość.
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
3
2
2
2
3
Rozpoczęcie automatycznego programowania od najniższej
częstotliwości (FM 87.50).
System ten może wyświetlać dane tekstowe nadawane przez
rozgłośnie radiowe (RDS) dostępne w niektórych rejonach.
Rozpoczęcie automatycznego programowania od bieżącej
częstotliwości*
1
.
Tuner zaczyna programowanie wszystkich stacji, które może
odbierać, w kolejności rosnącej.
Aby anulować, naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
].
“STEREO” pojawia się po nastrojeniu na stację stereo.\
RDS jest dostępny wyłącznie, gdy system stereo pracuje w trybie
odbioru.
Możesz także nacisnąć [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] na
urządzeniu głównym, gry wybrano “STATION” jako tryb
skanowania*
1
.
Nowa stacja zastąpi wcześniej zaprogramowaną znajdującą się
pod tym samym numerem.
Nie można zaprogramować stacji, gdy stacja nie nadaje lub gdy
została wybrana usługa dodatkowa.
Podczas automatycznego skanowania zaprogramowane stacje
zostają usunięte.
Możesz także nacisnąć [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] na urządzeniu
głównym, gry wybrano “PRESET” jako tryb skanowania*
1
.
Aby zaprogramować więcej stacji, wykonaj ponownie kroki od
1 do 3.
Jeżeli nie wykryto stacji, pojawi się komunikat “SCAN FAILED”.
Ustaw antenę i spróbuj ponownie.
Wyświetli się “START?”.
Wyświetli się “DAB AUTO SCAN”.
RDS może nie być dostępny w przypadku słabego odbioru.
Jeśli wybierasz “DAB+” pierwszy raz, system rozpocznie procedurę
“DAB AUTO SCAN”.
Możesz także nacisnąć [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
]na
urządzeniu głównym, gdy wybrano “MANUAL”jako tryb
skanowania*
2
.
Możesz także nacisnąć [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] lub [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] na urządzeniu
głównym, gdy wybrano “PRESET” jako tryb strojenia*
2
.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać “TUNE MODE”.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać
“TUNEMODE”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “MANUAL” lub “PRESET”, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby wybrać “STATION” lub “PRESET” i
naciśnij [OK].
Aby zmienić częstotliwość, przeczytaj rozdział “Ręczne
skanowanie i programowanie”.
Aby zmienić tryb strojenia
Aby zmienić tryb skanowania
Aby uruchomić automatyczne skanowanie, należy nacisnąć
i przytrzymać ten przycisk do momentu, gdy wyświetlana
częstotliwość zacznie szybko się zmieniać.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*
1
:
*
2
:
*
1
:
2
2
1
1
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
PMX92
TQBM0358
10
^------------------- (------------------
b
Wyświetlanie dostępnych informacji
Ustawianie zegara
Zmiana brzmienia
BASS
TREBLE
SURROUND
Timer wyłączający
Efekty dźwiękowe
Zegar i timer
Ustawienia DAB/DAB+
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
4
2
2
Naciśnij [DISPLAY] aby wyświetlić dostępne informacje.
Włączanie timera
Naciśnij [CLOCK/TIMER], aby wybrać “CLOCK”.
Przygotuj wybrane źródło dźwięku i ustaw żądaną
głośność.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
10
You can view information about the DAB/DAB+
broadcast, programme type, ensemble label, frequency
and time.
Press [DISPLAY] to view available information.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select an
option.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting and
then press [OK].
When adjusting the antenna, you can check the
reception quality.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select
“SIGNAL QUALITY”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select frequency.
The current frequency block is displayed and then
the reception quality is indicated.
Clock and timers
This is a 24-hour clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to select “CLOCK”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the time and then press [OK].
To check the time
Press [CLOCK/TIMER].
Note:
• Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
The sleep timer switches off the system after the set
time.
Press [SLEEP] repeatedly to select the setting (in
minutes).
Note:
• The remaining time is indicated on the unit’s display at
every minute except when other operations are performed.
“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.
• The sleep timer can be used together with the play timer.
• The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an
overlap of timers.
You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to
wake you up.
Preparation
Set the clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select
“TIMER ADJ”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the starting time (“ON TIME”)
and then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to set the finishing time
(“OFF TIME”) and then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the music source*
1
and
then press [OK].
Turning the timer on
1 Prepare the selected music source and set the
desired volume.
2 Press [F, PLAY].
“F” is shown.
To cancel, press [F, PLAY] again.
The system must be switched off for the timer to operate.
To check the settings
Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.
(During standby, press [CLOCK/TIMER] twice.)
Note:
• The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to
the preset level.
• The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is
on.
• If you switch off the system and switch on again while a
timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.
*1: “CD”, “USB”, “DAB+” ([PMX92]), and “FM” can be set as
the music source.
• For timer music source through the port for USB
devices, select “USB”.
Sound effects
1
Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select a sound
effect.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting.
By main unit only
Turn [BASS] or [TREBLE] to adjust the level.
Viewing available information
DAB/DAB+ settings
DAB SECONDARY
PRIMARY To listen to primary service.
SECONDARY To listen to secondary services.
“ ” is shown.
AUTO CLOCK ADJ
ON ADJUST Start auto clock adjustment.
OFF ADJUST Cancel auto clock adjustment.
DAB/DAB+ signal quality
Reception quality
0 (poor) to 8 (excellent)
Setting the clock
Sleep timer
Play timer
“SLEEP 30” -. “SLEEP 60” -. “SLEEP 90” -. “SLEEP 120”
^------------------- “OFF” (Cancel) (------------------
b
Changing the sound quality
BASS
-4 to +4
TREBLE
SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or
“OFF SURROUND”
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 10 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
, PLAY].
Sprawdzanie ustawień
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby ustawić czas, a następnie
naciśnij [OK].
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Aby sprawdzić godzinę
Aby słuchać usługi podstawowej.
Rozpoczyna automatyczne ustawienie zegara.
Anuluje automatyczne ustawienie zegara.
Możesz sprawdzić jakość odbioru podczas ustawiania anteny.
Wyświetli się aktualny zakres częstotliwości i jakość odbioru.
Jakość odbioru zawiera się
między 0 (słaba) a 8 (doskonała)
Aby słuchać usługi dodatkowej. Wyświetli
się “
TQBM0358
10
You can view information about the DAB/DAB+
broadcast, programme type, ensemble label, frequency
and time.
Press [DISPLAY] to view available information.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select an
option.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting and
then press [OK].
When adjusting the antenna, you can check the
reception quality.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select
“SIGNAL QUALITY”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select frequency.
The current frequency block is displayed and then
the reception quality is indicated.
Clock and timers
This is a 24-hour clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to select “CLOCK”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the time and then press [OK].
To check the time
Press [CLOCK/TIMER].
Note:
• Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
The sleep timer switches off the system after the set
time.
Press [SLEEP] repeatedly to select the setting (in
minutes).
Note:
• The remaining time is indicated on the unit’s display at
every minute except when other operations are performed.
“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.
• The sleep timer can be used together with the play timer.
• The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an
overlap of timers.
You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to
wake you up.
Preparation
Set the clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select
“TIMER ADJ”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the starting time (“ON TIME”)
and then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to set the finishing time
(“OFF TIME”) and then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the music source*
1
and
then press [OK].
Turning the timer on
1 Prepare the selected music source and set the
desired volume.
2 Press [F, PLAY].
“F” is shown.
To cancel, press [F, PLAY] again.
The system must be switched off for the timer to operate.
To check the settings
Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.
(During standby, press [CLOCK/TIMER] twice.)
Note:
• The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to
the preset level.
• The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is
on.
• If you switch off the system and switch on again while a
timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.
*1: “CD”, “USB”, “DAB+” ([PMX92]), and “FM” can be set as
the music source.
• For timer music source through the port for USB
devices, select “USB”.
Sound effects
1
Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select a sound
effect.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting.
By main unit only
Turn [BASS] or [TREBLE] to adjust the level.
Viewing available information
DAB/DAB+ settings
DAB SECONDARY
PRIMARY To listen to primary service.
SECONDARY To listen to secondary services.
“ ” is shown.
AUTO CLOCK ADJ
ON ADJUST Start auto clock adjustment.
OFF ADJUST Cancel auto clock adjustment.
DAB/DAB+ signal quality
Reception quality
0 (poor) to 8 (excellent)
Setting the clock
Sleep timer
Play timer
“SLEEP 30” -. “SLEEP 60” -. “SLEEP 90” -. “SLEEP 120”
^------------------- “OFF” (Cancel) (------------------
b
Changing the sound quality
BASS
-4 to +4
TREBLE
SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or
“OFF SURROUND”
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 10 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać opcję.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać
“SIGNAL QUALITY”.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [CLOCK/TIMER], aby wybrać
“TIMER ADJ”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby ustawić czas rozpoczęcia (“ON
TIME”), a następnie naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby ustawić czas zakończenia (“OFF
TIME”), a następnie naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać źródło dźwięku*
1
, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
Przygotowanie
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby wybrać częstotliwość.
DAB SECONDARY
Jakość sygnału DAB/DAB+
Timer odtwarzania
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
AUTO CLOCK ADJ
ON ADJUST
OFF ADJUST
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] aby wybrać ustawienie i naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij [SLEEP] kilkakrotnie, aby wybrać ustawienie (w
minutach).
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [SOUND], aby wybrać efekt
dźwiękowy.
Naciśnij [2, 1], aby wybrać żądane ustawienie.
Tylko poprzez urządzenie główne
Przekręć pokrętło [BASS] lub [TREBLE], aby wyregulować
poziom.
Możesz wyświetlić informacje o transmisji DAB/DAB+, typie
programu, etykiecie, częstotliwości i czasie.
Jest to zegar 24-godzinny.
Naciśnij [CLOCK/TIMER].
Timer wyłącza system po upływie ustawionego czasu.
“SLEEP 30” “SLEEP 60” “SLEEP 90” “SLEEP 120”
“OFF” (Anuluj)
Zegar należy regularnie nastawiać, aby zawsze była ustawiona
dokładna godzina.
Timer rozpoczyna odtwarzanie z niskim poziomem głośności,
który stopniowo rośnie do ustawionego poziomu.
Jeśli timer jest aktywny, zadziała codziennie o ustawionej godzinie.
W przypadku wyłączenia systemu i włączenia go ponownie podczas
pracy timera, timer nie zatrzyma się z chwilą upływu ustawionego czasu.
Aby ustawić źródło dźwięku timera przez port dla urządzeń
USB, wybierz “USB”.
-4 do +4
“ON SURROUND” lub
“OFF SURROUND”
Jako źródło dźwięku można wybrać “CD”, “USB”, “DAB+”
(
TQBM0358
10
You can view information about the DAB/DAB+
broadcast, programme type, ensemble label, frequency
and time.
Press [DISPLAY] to view available information.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select an
option.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting and
then press [OK].
When adjusting the antenna, you can check the
reception quality.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select
“SIGNAL QUALITY”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select frequency.
The current frequency block is displayed and then
the reception quality is indicated.
Clock and timers
This is a 24-hour clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to select “CLOCK”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the time and then press [OK].
To check the time
Press [CLOCK/TIMER].
Note:
• Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
The sleep timer switches off the system after the set
time.
Press [SLEEP] repeatedly to select the setting (in
minutes).
Note:
• The remaining time is indicated on the unit’s display at
every minute except when other operations are performed.
“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.
• The sleep timer can be used together with the play timer.
• The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an
overlap of timers.
You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to
wake you up.
Preparation
Set the clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select
“TIMER ADJ”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the starting time (“ON TIME”)
and then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to set the finishing time
(“OFF TIME”) and then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the music source*
1
and
then press [OK].
Turning the timer on
1 Prepare the selected music source and set the
desired volume.
2 Press [F, PLAY].
“F” is shown.
To cancel, press [F, PLAY] again.
The system must be switched off for the timer to operate.
To check the settings
Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.
(During standby, press [CLOCK/TIMER] twice.)
Note:
• The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to
the preset level.
• The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is
on.
• If you switch off the system and switch on again while a
timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.
*1: “CD”, “USB”, “DAB+” ([PMX92]), and “FM” can be set as
the music source.
• For timer music source through the port for USB
devices, select “USB”.
Sound effects
1
Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select a sound
effect.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting.
By main unit only
Turn [BASS] or [TREBLE] to adjust the level.
Viewing available information
DAB/DAB+ settings
DAB SECONDARY
PRIMARY To listen to primary service.
SECONDARY To listen to secondary services.
“ ” is shown.
AUTO CLOCK ADJ
ON ADJUST Start auto clock adjustment.
OFF ADJUST Cancel auto clock adjustment.
DAB/DAB+ signal quality
Reception quality
0 (poor) to 8 (excellent)
Setting the clock
Sleep timer
Play timer
“SLEEP 30” -. “SLEEP 60” -. “SLEEP 90” -. “SLEEP 120”
^------------------- “OFF” (Cancel) (------------------
b
Changing the sound quality
BASS
-4 to +4
TREBLE
SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or
“OFF SURROUND”
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 10 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
]) i “FM”.
Wyświetlony zostanie symbol “
TQBM0358
10
You can view information about the DAB/DAB+
broadcast, programme type, ensemble label, frequency
and time.
Press [DISPLAY] to view available information.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select an
option.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting and
then press [OK].
When adjusting the antenna, you can check the
reception quality.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select
“SIGNAL QUALITY”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select frequency.
The current frequency block is displayed and then
the reception quality is indicated.
Clock and timers
This is a 24-hour clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to select “CLOCK”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the time and then press [OK].
To check the time
Press [CLOCK/TIMER].
Note:
• Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
The sleep timer switches off the system after the set
time.
Press [SLEEP] repeatedly to select the setting (in
minutes).
Note:
• The remaining time is indicated on the unit’s display at
every minute except when other operations are performed.
“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.
• The sleep timer can be used together with the play timer.
• The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an
overlap of timers.
You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to
wake you up.
Preparation
Set the clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select
“TIMER ADJ”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the starting time (“ON TIME”)
and then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to set the finishing time
(“OFF TIME”) and then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the music source*
1
and
then press [OK].
Turning the timer on
1 Prepare the selected music source and set the
desired volume.
2 Press [F, PLAY].
“F” is shown.
To cancel, press [F, PLAY] again.
The system must be switched off for the timer to operate.
To check the settings
Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.
(During standby, press [CLOCK/TIMER] twice.)
Note:
• The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to
the preset level.
• The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is
on.
• If you switch off the system and switch on again while a
timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.
*1: “CD”, “USB”, “DAB+” ([PMX92]), and “FM” can be set as
the music source.
• For timer music source through the port for USB
devices, select “USB”.
Sound effects
1
Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select a sound
effect.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting.
By main unit only
Turn [BASS] or [TREBLE] to adjust the level.
Viewing available information
DAB/DAB+ settings
DAB SECONDARY
PRIMARY To listen to primary service.
SECONDARY To listen to secondary services.
“ ” is shown.
AUTO CLOCK ADJ
ON ADJUST Start auto clock adjustment.
OFF ADJUST Cancel auto clock adjustment.
DAB/DAB+ signal quality
Reception quality
0 (poor) to 8 (excellent)
Setting the clock
Sleep timer
Play timer
“SLEEP 30” -. “SLEEP 60” -. “SLEEP 90” -. “SLEEP 120”
^------------------- “OFF” (Cancel) (------------------
b
Changing the sound quality
BASS
-4 to +4
TREBLE
SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or
“OFF SURROUND”
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 10 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
”.
Aby wyłączyć, ponownie naciśnij [
TQBM0358
10
You can view information about the DAB/DAB+
broadcast, programme type, ensemble label, frequency
and time.
Press [DISPLAY] to view available information.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select an
option.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting and
then press [OK].
When adjusting the antenna, you can check the
reception quality.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select
“SIGNAL QUALITY”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select frequency.
The current frequency block is displayed and then
the reception quality is indicated.
Clock and timers
This is a 24-hour clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to select “CLOCK”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the time and then press [OK].
To check the time
Press [CLOCK/TIMER].
Note:
• Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
The sleep timer switches off the system after the set
time.
Press [SLEEP] repeatedly to select the setting (in
minutes).
Note:
• The remaining time is indicated on the unit’s display at
every minute except when other operations are performed.
“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.
• The sleep timer can be used together with the play timer.
• The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an
overlap of timers.
You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to
wake you up.
Preparation
Set the clock.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select
“TIMER ADJ”.
2 Press [3, 4] to set the starting time (“ON TIME”)
and then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to set the finishing time
(“OFF TIME”) and then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the music source*
1
and
then press [OK].
Turning the timer on
1 Prepare the selected music source and set the
desired volume.
2 Press [F, PLAY].
“F” is shown.
To cancel, press [F, PLAY] again.
The system must be switched off for the timer to operate.
To check the settings
Press [CLOCK/TIMER] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.
(During standby, press [CLOCK/TIMER] twice.)
Note:
• The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to
the preset level.
• The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is
on.
• If you switch off the system and switch on again while a
timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.
*1: “CD”, “USB”, “DAB+” ([PMX92]), and “FM” can be set as
the music source.
• For timer music source through the port for USB
devices, select “USB”.
Sound effects
1
Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select a sound
effect.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired setting.
By main unit only
Turn [BASS] or [TREBLE] to adjust the level.
Viewing available information
DAB/DAB+ settings
DAB SECONDARY
PRIMARY To listen to primary service.
SECONDARY To listen to secondary services.
“ ” is shown.
AUTO CLOCK ADJ
ON ADJUST Start auto clock adjustment.
OFF ADJUST Cancel auto clock adjustment.
DAB/DAB+ signal quality
Reception quality
0 (poor) to 8 (excellent)
Setting the clock
Sleep timer
Play timer
“SLEEP 30” -. “SLEEP 60” -. “SLEEP 90” -. “SLEEP 120”
^------------------- “OFF” (Cancel) (------------------
b
Changing the sound quality
BASS
-4 to +4
TREBLE
SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or
“OFF SURROUND”
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 10 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
, PLAY].
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [CLOCK/TIMER], aby wybrać “TIMER ADJ”.
(W trybie gotowości, naciśnij dwukrotnie [CLOCK/TIMER].)
Aby timer działał, system musi być wyłączony.
Pozostały czas jest pokazywany na wyświetlaczu urządzenia głównego
w każdej minucie, z wyjątkiem sytuacji gdy wykonywane są inne
operacje. Gdy pozostaje już tylko 1 minuta wyświetlane jest “SLEEP 1”.
Timer wyłączający system może być używany łącznie z timerem
odtwarzania.
Timer wyłączający ma zawsze priorytet. Należy pamiętać, aby czasy
timerów się nie nakładały.
Timer można ustawić w taki sposób, aby o określonej godzinie
urządzenie włączało się i budziło użytkownika.
Ustaw zegar.
•
•
•
•
•
*
1
:
•
•
•
1
2
11
TQBM0358
USB
Zaprogramowany korektor
D.BASS
Autoodtwarzanie Słuchanie muzyki z komputera
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [PRESET EQ], aby wybrać ustawienie.
Poprawa brzmienia rockaHEAVY
SOFT
CLEAR
VOCAL
FLAT
Czystsze brzmienie wysokich częstotliwości
System automatycznie przełączy się na źródło AUX, gdy wykryje
sygnał z zewnętrznego urządzenia muzycznego.
Ta funkcja działa również w trybie gotowości.
Poprawa brzmienia śpiewu
Wyłącza efekt dźwiękowy
Funkcja ta pozwala cieszyć się potężnym basem.
Podłącz urządzenie zewnętrzne do gniazda AUX IN.
Można zmienić poziom wejścia.
Ustawienie fabryczne to “HIGH”.
Ustawienie fabryczne to “OFF”.
Kabel USB 2.0
(nie należy do wyposażenia)
Typ A
Typ B
PC
Ta funkcja nie działa, gdy głośność zewnętrznego urządzenia
muzycznego jest zbyt niska, należy zatem zwiększyć jego głośność.
Gdy funkcja ta jest wyłączona i za każdym razem, gdy źródło
przełączone zostanie na AUX, jeden raz wyświetlone zostanie
“AUX-IN AUTO PLAY IS OFF”.
W przypadku korzystania z niniejszej funkcji w trybie gotowości
może upłynąć kilka sekund, zanim rozpocznie się odtwarzanie
dźwięku.
Gdy ta funkcja jest ustawiona na “ON”, zużycie energii w trybie
gotowości wzrośnie. (Około 1,9 W).
Muzykę można odtwarzać z komputera PC przez głośniki systemu
poprzez podłączenie komputera PC do gniazda PC IN w urządzeniu
głównym.
Informacje o obsługiwanych formatach znaleźć można w “Dane
techniczne” ( 14).
Postępuj w sposób podany poniżej.
(Strona wyłącznie w języku angielskim)
(Strona wyłącznie w języku angielskim)
(stan na sierpień 2018)
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/audio/
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/audio/
Zalecane wersje systemu operacyjnego komputera:
Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10
OS X 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10, 10.11
macOS 10.12, 10.13
Podczas odtwarzania dźwięku wysokiej rozdzielczości zaleca się
stosowanie kabla USB zgodnego z USB 2.0 High Speed.
Mac oraz OS X to znaki towarowe rmy Apple Inc., zarejestrowane w
USA i innych krajach.
Windows jest znakiem towarowym lub zarejestrowanym znakiem
towarowym rmy Microsoft Corporation w Stanach Zjednoczonych i
w innych krajach.
macOS to znak towarowy rmy Apple Inc.
Pobierz i zainstaluj odpowiedni sterownik na komputerze.
(Dotyczy tylko systemu Windows)
Pobierz i zainstaluj sterownik z poniższej strony internetowej.
Pobierz i zainstaluj odpowiednią aplikację
“Panasonic Audio Player 2” (darmowa) na komputerze. (Dla
systemów Windows i OS X)
Pobierz i zainstaluj aplikację z poniższej strony internetowej.
1
2
Zatrzymaj lub chwilowo wstrzymaj zewnętrzne urządzenie muzyczne,
zanim przejdziesz do innego źródła muzyki lub trybu gotowości, aby
zapobiec automatycznemu przełączeniu na źródło AUX.
Wybierz “LOW”, jeżeli dźwięk jest zniekształcony na poziomie “HIGH”.
Więcej informacji znajduje się w Instrukcji obsługi zewnętrznego
urządzenia muzycznego.
Komponenty i przewody sprzedawane są osobno.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
–
–
–
•
•
•
•
Możesz zmienić poziom wejścia itp. podczas słuchania dźwięku z
przenośnego odtwarzacza audio itp. podłączonego do gniazda AUX IN.
Naciśnij [D.BASS], aby wybrać “ON D.BASS” lub “OFF D.BASS”.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [SETUP], aby wybrać
“AUX-IN AUTO PLAY”.
Odłącz przewód zasilania.
Podłącz urządzenie główne do komputera.
Podłącz przewód zasilania do urządzenia głównego i
uruchom system.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO, EXT-IN], aby wybrać “PC”.
Uruchom na komputerze odtwarzanie.
Urządzenie główne (tył)
Port USB-DAC
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “ON”, a następnie
naciśnij [OK].
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [SOUND], aby wybrać
“INPUT LEVEL”.
1
2
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “LOW” lub “HIGH”, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
Uwaga:
Uwaga:
Przed podłączeniem do komputera
Przygotowanie
Wejście AUX IN
Korzystanie z wejścia komputera
Regulacja poziomu wejścia
Dla muzyki w tle
Uwaga:
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
TQBM0358
12
Inne
Zgodnie z ustawieniami fabrycznymi, urządzenie przełącza się do
trybu gotowości automatycznie, jeżeli nie jest odtwarzany dźwięk
i urządzenie nie jest używane przez około 20 minut.
Aby włączyć funkcję, wybierz “ON” w kroku 2.
Nie można wybrać tego ustawienia, gdy źródłem jest radio.
Po podłączeniu do urządzenia Bluetooth
®
, funkcja ta nie
będzie działać.
Szczegółowe informacje można znaleźć na poniższej stronie
internetowej.
Wyświetlona zostanie wersja zainstalowanego oprogramowania.
Naciśnij [OK], aby wyjść.
•
•
•
(Strona w języku angielskim)
Co jakiś czas rma Panasonic może udostępnić zaktualizowane
oprogramowanie dla tego urządzenia, które może ulepszyć istniejące
funkcje lub dodać nowe funkcje. Aktualizacje te są darmowe.
Przed oddaniem urządzenia do naprawy należy przeprowadzić
następujące kontrole. W przypadku wątpliwości co do niektórych
punktów kontrolnych lub jeśli podane rozwiązania nie eliminują
problemu, należy zwrócić się po wskazówki do sprzedawcy.
Po podłączeniu przewodu zasilania odczekaj około 10 sekund zanim
włączysz urządzenie.
Regulacja głośności systemu.
Upewnij się, że kable głośnikowe są podłączone prawidłowo i
solidnie. ( 4)
Format urządzenia USB lub jego zawartość nie jest obsługiwana
przez system.
Pliki o dużych rozmiarach lub urządzenia USB z dużą ilością
pamięci wymagają dłuższego czasu wczytywania.
Skopiuj dane do innego urządzenia USB lub utwórz kopię zapasową
danych i sformatuj urządzenia USB.
Sprawdź stan urządzenia Bluetooth
®
.
Parowanie urządzenia się nie powiodło lub rejestracja została
zastąpiona nową. Spróbuj sparować urządzenie ponownie.
System może być podłączony do innego urządzenia. Odłącz inne
urządzenie i spróbuj sparować urządzenie ponownie.
Jeśli w “LINK MODE” wybrano “MODE 2”, należy wybrać “MODE
1”. ( 6)
Jeżeli problem utrzymuje się, wyłącz urządzenie i włącz je ponownie.
W razie potrzeby powtórz jeszcze raz.
W przypadku niektórych wbudowanych urządzeń Bluetooth
®
konieczne jest ręczne ustawienie odtwarzania dźwięku na “SC-
PMX92” lub “SC-PMX90”. Szczegółowe informacje znajdują się w
instrukcji obsługi danego urządzenia.
Urządzenie znajduje się poza zasięgiem komunikacji 10 m. Umieść
urządzenie Bluetooth
®
bliżej systemu.
Usuń wszelkie przeszkody występujące pomiędzy systemem a
urządzeniem.
Wybierz “MODE 1” w celu zapewnienia stabilnej komunikacji. ( 6)
Inne urządzenia korzystające z zakresu częstotliwości 2,4
GHz (router bezprzewodowy, kuchenki mikrofalowe, telefony
bezprzewodowe itp.) mogą powodować zakłócenia. Zbliż Bluetooth
®
urządzenie do systemu i upewnij się, że nie jest ono zbyt blisko
innych urządzeń.
Cyfrowe wejście audio niniejszego urządzenia może wykryć tylko
liniowe sygnały PCM (LPCM). Szczegółowe informacje znajdują się
w instrukcji obsługi urządzenia.
Blisko urządzenia znajdują się przewody zasilania prądem
przemiennym lub oświetlenie uorescencyjne. Należy utrzymywać
przewody zasilania tego urządzenia z dala od innych urządzeń lub
przewodów zasilających.
Być może włączył się jeden z mechanizmów bezpieczeństwa
urządzenia.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
12
Others
As a factory default, this unit will turn to standby mode
automatically if there is no sound and it is not being used
for approximately 20 minutes.
To cancel this function
1 Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “OFF” and then press
[OK].
Note:
• To turn the function on, select “ON” in step 2.
• This setting cannot be selected when radio is the source.
• When connected to a Bluetooth
®
device, the function does
not work.
Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software
for this unit that may add or improve the way a feature
operates. These updates are available free of charge.
For more details, refer to the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
(This site is in English only.)
Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and
then press [OK].
The version of the installed software is displayed.
• Press [OK] to exit.
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If
you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the
solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult
your dealer for instructions.
Cannot turn on the unit.
• After connecting the AC mains lead, wait about
10 seconds before turning on the unit.
No operations can be done with the remote control.
• Examine that the battery is installed correctly.
Sound is distorted or no sound.
• Adjust the volume of the system.
• Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause,
then switch the system on again. It can be caused by
straining of the speakers through excessive volume or
power, and when using the system in a hot environment.
• Ensure the speaker cables are connected correctly
and securely. (> 4)
• The digital audio input terminal of this unit can only
detect linear PCM (LPCM) signals. For details, refer to
the operating instructions of the device.
A “humming” sound can be heard during playback.
• An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the
cables. Keep other appliances and cords away from
the cables of this system.
The unit does not work.
• One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
1 Press [Í/I] on the unit to switch the unit to standby.
• If the unit does not turn off, disconnect the AC mains
lead from the AC outlet, reconnect it to the outlet after
about 30 seconds. Then wait for about 10 seconds.
2 Press [Í/I] on the unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Noise is heard.
• During “AUX” mode, when a device is connected to
both the AUX IN terminals and the USB port, noise
may be generated depending on the device. In this
case, remove the USB cable from the USB port.
Display not shown correctly.
Playback does not start.
• You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.
• Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.
• Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.
•
There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.
Reception is poor or a beat sound is heard.
• Keep the antenna away from computers, TVs, other
cables and cords.
• Use an outdoor antenna.
• Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.
If noise is excessive during FM reception.
• Change the audio to be output as monaural.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select “FM MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].
The sound becomes monaural.
• To cancel, select “STEREO” or change the frequency.
In normal circumstances, select “STEREO”.
The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.
• The format of the USB device or the contents in it is/
are not compatible with the system.
Slow operation of the USB device.
• Large content size or large memory USB device takes
longer time to read.
The elapsed time shown is different from the actual
play time.
• Transfer the data to another USB device or backup the
data and reformat the USB device.
Pairing cannot be done.
• Check the Bluetooth
®
device condition.
The device cannot be connected.
• The pairing of the device was unsuccessful or the
registration has been replaced. Try pairing the device
again.
• This system might be connected to a different device.
Disconnect the other device and try pairing the device
again.
• If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select
“MODE 1”. (> 6)
• If the problem persists, turn the unit off and on, then try
again.
The device is connected but audio cannot be heard
through this system.
• For some built-in Bluetooth
®
devices, you have to set
the audio output to “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90”
manually. Read the operating instructions for the
device for details.
The sound is interrupted.
• The device is out of the 10 m communication range.
Bring the Bluetooth
®
device closer to this system.
• Remove any obstacle between this system and the
device.
• Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band
(wireless router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.)
are interfering. Bring the Bluetooth
®
device closer to
this system and distance it from the other devices.
• Select “MODE 1” for stable communication. (> 6)
Auto off function
Software update
Checking the software version
Common problems
Disc
Radio
USB
Bluetooth
®
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 12 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
/I] na urządzeniu głównym, aby przełączyć je w tryb
gotowości.
Jeśli urządzenie nie wyłącza się, należy odłączyć przewód
zasilania od gniazdka sieciowego, podłączyć go ponownie po
około 30 sekundach, a następnie odczekać około 10 sekund.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
12
Others
As a factory default, this unit will turn to standby mode
automatically if there is no sound and it is not being used
for approximately 20 minutes.
To cancel this function
1 Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “OFF” and then press
[OK].
Note:
• To turn the function on, select “ON” in step 2.
• This setting cannot be selected when radio is the source.
• When connected to a Bluetooth
®
device, the function does
not work.
Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software
for this unit that may add or improve the way a feature
operates. These updates are available free of charge.
For more details, refer to the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
(This site is in English only.)
Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and
then press [OK].
The version of the installed software is displayed.
• Press [OK] to exit.
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If
you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the
solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult
your dealer for instructions.
Cannot turn on the unit.
• After connecting the AC mains lead, wait about
10 seconds before turning on the unit.
No operations can be done with the remote control.
• Examine that the battery is installed correctly.
Sound is distorted or no sound.
• Adjust the volume of the system.
• Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause,
then switch the system on again. It can be caused by
straining of the speakers through excessive volume or
power, and when using the system in a hot environment.
• Ensure the speaker cables are connected correctly
and securely. (> 4)
• The digital audio input terminal of this unit can only
detect linear PCM (LPCM) signals. For details, refer to
the operating instructions of the device.
A “humming” sound can be heard during playback.
• An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the
cables. Keep other appliances and cords away from
the cables of this system.
The unit does not work.
• One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
1 Press [Í/I] on the unit to switch the unit to standby.
• If the unit does not turn off, disconnect the AC mains
lead from the AC outlet, reconnect it to the outlet after
about 30 seconds. Then wait for about 10 seconds.
2 Press [Í/I] on the unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Noise is heard.
• During “AUX” mode, when a device is connected to
both the AUX IN terminals and the USB port, noise
may be generated depending on the device. In this
case, remove the USB cable from the USB port.
Display not shown correctly.
Playback does not start.
• You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.
• Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.
• Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.
•
There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.
Reception is poor or a beat sound is heard.
• Keep the antenna away from computers, TVs, other
cables and cords.
• Use an outdoor antenna.
• Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.
If noise is excessive during FM reception.
• Change the audio to be output as monaural.
1 Press [RADIO MENU] repeatedly to select “FM MODE”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].
The sound becomes monaural.
• To cancel, select “STEREO” or change the frequency.
In normal circumstances, select “STEREO”.
The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.
• The format of the USB device or the contents in it is/
are not compatible with the system.
Slow operation of the USB device.
• Large content size or large memory USB device takes
longer time to read.
The elapsed time shown is different from the actual
play time.
• Transfer the data to another USB device or backup the
data and reformat the USB device.
Pairing cannot be done.
• Check the Bluetooth
®
device condition.
The device cannot be connected.
• The pairing of the device was unsuccessful or the
registration has been replaced. Try pairing the device
again.
• This system might be connected to a different device.
Disconnect the other device and try pairing the device
again.
• If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select
“MODE 1”. (> 6)
• If the problem persists, turn the unit off and on, then try
again.
The device is connected but audio cannot be heard
through this system.
• For some built-in Bluetooth
®
devices, you have to set
the audio output to “SC-PMX92” or “SC-PMX90”
manually. Read the operating instructions for the
device for details.
The sound is interrupted.
• The device is out of the 10 m communication range.
Bring the Bluetooth
®
device closer to this system.
• Remove any obstacle between this system and the
device.
• Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band
(wireless router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.)
are interfering. Bring the Bluetooth
®
device closer to
this system and distance it from the other devices.
• Select “MODE 1” for stable communication. (> 6)
Auto off function
Software update
Checking the software version
Common problems
Disc
Radio
USB
Bluetooth
®
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 12 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
/I] na urządzeniu głównym, aby je włączyć. Jeżeli
urządzenie nadal nie działa, skontaktuj się ze sprzedawcą.
Płyta nie została włożona prawidłowo. Włóż prawidłowo płytę.
Płyta jest zabrudzona. Wyczyść płytę.
Użyj innej płyty, jeśli jest zarysowana, wygięta lub niestandardowa.
Nastąpiło skroplenie pary wodnej. Odczekaj 1 do 2 godzin, aż
skroplona para wodna odparuje z systemu.
Odsuń antenę od urządzeń takich jak komputer, telewizor oraz od
innych kabli i przewodów.
Użyj anteny zewnętrznej.
Wyłącz telewizor lub odsuń go dalej od systemu.
DW trybie “AUX”, kiedy urządzenie jest podłączone jednocześnie
do gniazda AUX IN i portu USB, w niektórych urządzeniach mogą
powstawać zakłócenia. W takim przypadku należy wyjąć kabel USB z
portu USB.
Należy wyłączyć urządzenie, określić i usunąć przyczynę, następnie
włączyć urządzenie ponownie. Może to być spowodowane
przeciążeniem głośników wskutek nadmiernego poziomu głośności,
zbyt wysokiego zasilania lub użytkowania systemu w warunkach, w
których panuje zbyt wysoka temperatura.
Sprawdź, czy bateria została prawidłowo umieszczona.
Funkcja automatycznego wyłączania
USB
Bluetooth
®
Nie można odczytać urządzenia USB lub jego zawartości
Powolne działanie urządzenia USB
Nie można przeprowadzić parowania
Urządzenie jest podłączone,
Urządzenie jest podłączone, ale dźwięk nie jest odtwarzany
z głośników zestawu.
Dźwięk jest przerywany
Wyświetlany czas, który upłynął jest inny niż czas
rzeczywisty
Aktualizacja oprogramowania
Sprawdzanie wersji oprogramowania
Nie można włączyć urządzenia
Nie działa pilot zdalnego sterowania
Rozwiązywanie problemów
Typowe problemy
Aby anulować tę funkcję
Uwaga:
Dźwięk jest zniekształcony lub brak dźwięku
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [SETUP], aby wybrać “AUTO OFF”.
1
2
Podczas odtwarzania słychać “buczenie”
Urządzenie nie działa
Słychać szum
Błędne informacje na wyświetlaczu
Słaba jakość dźwięku lub słyszalne dudniące zakłócenia
Nie uruchamia się odtwarzanie
Płyty kompaktowe szum
Radio
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “OFF”, a następnie naciśnij
[OK].
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [SETUP], aby wybrać “SW VER.”, a
następnie naciśnij [OK].
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zmień wyjście dźwięku na monofoniczne.
Naciśnij kilkakrotnie [RADIO MENU], aby wybrać “FM MODE”.
Naciśnij [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
,
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
], aby wybrać “MONO”, a następnie naciśnij [OK].
Dźwięk zmienia się w monofoniczny.
Aby anulować, wybierz “STEREO” lub zmień częstotliwość.
W normalnej sytuacji wybierz “STEREO”.
Jeśli słychać nadmierny szum podczas odbioru FM
•
•
1
2
13
TQBM0358
“Autoodtwarzanie AUX-IN” nie działa
Nieumyślne automatyczne przełączenie na źródło AUX
Komputer nie rozpoznaje systemu
Wyświetlacz urządzenia
“ADJUST CLOCK”
PC
AUX
“--:--”
Zewnętrze urządzenie muzyczne zostało połączone nieprawidłowo.
Urządzenie USB nie jest podłączone. Sprawdź połączenie.
Stacje nie są osiągalne. Sprawdź antenę i spróbuj skanowania
ręcznego DAB/DAB+.
Urządzenie USB pobiera zbyt dużo prądu. Odłącz urządzenie
USB, po czym wyłącz i włącz system ponownie.
System nie może pokazać pozostałego czasu odtwarzania dla
ścieżek ze zmienną prędkością bitów (VBR).
“WAIT”
“VBR”
“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”
“SCAN FAILED” (
13
TQBM0358
“AUX-IN auto play” does not work.
• You have not connected the external music device
correctly.
• Increase the volume of the external music device.
• If “OFF” was selected during “AUX-IN AUTO PLAY”,
select “ON”.
Unintentional automatic switch to AUX source.
• Connect the audio cable to the system only after all the
other connections have been made.
Noise may be detected when connecting the external
music device and it will cause the set to automatically
switch to AUX source.
The PC does not recognise this system.
• Check your operating environment. (> 11)
• Restart the PC, turn off and on this system, and then
reconnect the USB cable.
• Use another USB port of the connected PC.
• Install the dedicated driver if using a PC with Windows.
“--:--”
• You connected the AC mains lead for the first time or
there was a power failure recently. Set the clock.
“ADJUST CLOCK”
• Clock is not set. Adjust the clock accordingly.
“ADJUST TIMER”
• Play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer accordingly.
“AUTO OFF”
• The unit has been left unused for about 20 minutes
and will shut down in a minute. Press any button to
cancel it.
“CHECKING CONNECTION”
• The unit is checking the connected USB device.
“ERROR”
• An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions
and try again.
“F” / “F” (“ ” stands for a number.)
• There is a problem with this unit.
Disconnect the AC mains lead from the AC outlet, reconnect
it to the outlet after about 30 seconds. Wait for about 10
seconds, then turn on the unit. If the problem still persists,
disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.
“NO DEVICE”
• The USB device is not connected. Examine the
connection.
“NO DISC”
• You have not put in a disc or put in a disc that the
system cannot play.
“NO PLAY”
• Examine the content. You can only play supported
format. (> 14)
• The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format
the USB device and try again.
• The unit may have a problem. Turn the unit off and
then on again.
“NO PRESET” ([PMX92])
• There are no preset DAB/DAB+ stations to select.
Preset some channels.
“NO SIGNAL” ([PMX 92])
• This station cannot be received. Check your antenna.
“DEVICE NO RESPONSE”
“HUB NOT SUPPORTED”
“NOT SUPPORTED”
• You have connected an unsupported USB device.
“OPT UNLOCKED”
• “OPT” is selected, but no device is connected.
• The sampling frequency components, etc. of the audio
signals are not input correctly.
– For supported formats, refer to “Connecting to OPT IN
(Optical Audio In) terminal” (@ 4).
“PC UNLOCKED”
• “PC” is selected, but a PC is not connected.
“PGM FULL”
• The number of programmed tracks is more than 24.
“PLAYERROR”
• You played an unsupported file. The system will skip
that track and play the next one.
“READING”
• The unit is checking the CD information. After this
display has disappeared, start operating.
• When starting playback of DSD files, it may take time
to read the file. Wait until reading completes.
“REMOTE ” (“ ” stands for a number.)
• The remote control and this unit are using different
codes. Change the code on the remote control.
– When “REMOTE 1” is displayed, press and hold [OK]
and [1] for at least 4 seconds.
– When “REMOTE 2” is displayed, press and hold [OK]
and [2] for at least 4 seconds.
“SCAN FAILED” ([PMX92])
• Stations are not receivable. Check your antenna and try
DAB/DAB+ manual tuning.
“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”
• The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove
the USB device. Switch the system off and on again.
“VBR”
• The system cannot show the remaining play time for
variable bit rate (VBR) tracks.
“WAIT”
• This is displayed, for example, when this unit is turning
off.
Reset the memory when the following situations occur:
• There is no response when buttons are pressed.
• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.
1 Disconnect the AC mains lead.
Wait 30 seconds before you continue with step 2.
2 While you press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit,
connect the AC mains lead again.
Keep holding down [Í/I] until “---------” appears on
the display.
3 Release [Í/I].
All the settings are set back to the factory default.
It is necessary to set the memory items again.
When other Panasonic equipment responds to the
remote control of this system, change the remote control
code for this system.
To set the code to “REMOTE 2”
1
Press [SELECTOR] on the main unit to select “CD”.
2
Press and hold [
∫
] on the main unit and [2] on the
remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.
3 Press and hold [OK] and [2] for a minimum of
4 seconds.
• The factory default is “REMOTE 1”.
• To change the mode back to “REMOTE 1”, repeat the
steps above but replace the button pressed on the
remote control from [2] to [1].
AUX
PC
Main unit displays
Memory reset (initialisation)
Remote control code
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 13 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
)
“REMOTE ” (“ ” oznacza numer.)
“F ” / “F” (“ ” oznacza numer.)
“ERROR”
“CHECKING CONNECTION”
“AUTO OFF”
“ADJUST TIMER”
“READING”
“PLAYERROR”
“PGM FULL”
“PC UNLOCKED”
“OPT UNLOCKED”
“NOT SUPPORTED”
“HUB NOT SUPPORTED”
“DEVICE NO RESPONSE”
“NO SIGNAL” (
13
TQBM0358
“AUX-IN auto play” does not work.
• You have not connected the external music device
correctly.
• Increase the volume of the external music device.
• If “OFF” was selected during “AUX-IN AUTO PLAY”,
select “ON”.
Unintentional automatic switch to AUX source.
• Connect the audio cable to the system only after all the
other connections have been made.
Noise may be detected when connecting the external
music device and it will cause the set to automatically
switch to AUX source.
The PC does not recognise this system.
• Check your operating environment. (> 11)
• Restart the PC, turn off and on this system, and then
reconnect the USB cable.
• Use another USB port of the connected PC.
• Install the dedicated driver if using a PC with Windows.
“--:--”
• You connected the AC mains lead for the first time or
there was a power failure recently. Set the clock.
“ADJUST CLOCK”
• Clock is not set. Adjust the clock accordingly.
“ADJUST TIMER”
• Play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer accordingly.
“AUTO OFF”
• The unit has been left unused for about 20 minutes
and will shut down in a minute. Press any button to
cancel it.
“CHECKING CONNECTION”
• The unit is checking the connected USB device.
“ERROR”
• An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions
and try again.
“F” / “F” (“ ” stands for a number.)
• There is a problem with this unit.
Disconnect the AC mains lead from the AC outlet, reconnect
it to the outlet after about 30 seconds. Wait for about 10
seconds, then turn on the unit. If the problem still persists,
disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.
“NO DEVICE”
• The USB device is not connected. Examine the
connection.
“NO DISC”
• You have not put in a disc or put in a disc that the
system cannot play.
“NO PLAY”
• Examine the content. You can only play supported
format. (> 14)
• The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format
the USB device and try again.
• The unit may have a problem. Turn the unit off and
then on again.
“NO PRESET” ([PMX92])
• There are no preset DAB/DAB+ stations to select.
Preset some channels.
“NO SIGNAL” ([PMX 92])
• This station cannot be received. Check your antenna.
“DEVICE NO RESPONSE”
“HUB NOT SUPPORTED”
“NOT SUPPORTED”
• You have connected an unsupported USB device.
“OPT UNLOCKED”
• “OPT” is selected, but no device is connected.
• The sampling frequency components, etc. of the audio
signals are not input correctly.
– For supported formats, refer to “Connecting to OPT IN
(Optical Audio In) terminal” (@ 4).
“PC UNLOCKED”
• “PC” is selected, but a PC is not connected.
“PGM FULL”
• The number of programmed tracks is more than 24.
“PLAYERROR”
• You played an unsupported file. The system will skip
that track and play the next one.
“READING”
• The unit is checking the CD information. After this
display has disappeared, start operating.
• When starting playback of DSD files, it may take time
to read the file. Wait until reading completes.
“REMOTE ” (“ ” stands for a number.)
• The remote control and this unit are using different
codes. Change the code on the remote control.
– When “REMOTE 1” is displayed, press and hold [OK]
and [1] for at least 4 seconds.
– When “REMOTE 2” is displayed, press and hold [OK]
and [2] for at least 4 seconds.
“SCAN FAILED” ([PMX92])
• Stations are not receivable. Check your antenna and try
DAB/DAB+ manual tuning.
“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”
• The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove
the USB device. Switch the system off and on again.
“VBR”
• The system cannot show the remaining play time for
variable bit rate (VBR) tracks.
“WAIT”
• This is displayed, for example, when this unit is turning
off.
Reset the memory when the following situations occur:
• There is no response when buttons are pressed.
• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.
1 Disconnect the AC mains lead.
Wait 30 seconds before you continue with step 2.
2 While you press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit,
connect the AC mains lead again.
Keep holding down [Í/I] until “---------” appears on
the display.
3 Release [Í/I].
All the settings are set back to the factory default.
It is necessary to set the memory items again.
When other Panasonic equipment responds to the
remote control of this system, change the remote control
code for this system.
To set the code to “REMOTE 2”
1
Press [SELECTOR] on the main unit to select “CD”.
2
Press and hold [
∫
] on the main unit and [2] on the
remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.
3 Press and hold [OK] and [2] for a minimum of
4 seconds.
• The factory default is “REMOTE 1”.
• To change the mode back to “REMOTE 1”, repeat the
steps above but replace the button pressed on the
remote control from [2] to [1].
AUX
PC
Main unit displays
Memory reset (initialisation)
Remote control code
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 13 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
)
“NO PRESET” (
13
TQBM0358
“AUX-IN auto play” does not work.
• You have not connected the external music device
correctly.
• Increase the volume of the external music device.
• If “OFF” was selected during “AUX-IN AUTO PLAY”,
select “ON”.
Unintentional automatic switch to AUX source.
• Connect the audio cable to the system only after all the
other connections have been made.
Noise may be detected when connecting the external
music device and it will cause the set to automatically
switch to AUX source.
The PC does not recognise this system.
• Check your operating environment. (> 11)
• Restart the PC, turn off and on this system, and then
reconnect the USB cable.
• Use another USB port of the connected PC.
• Install the dedicated driver if using a PC with Windows.
“--:--”
• You connected the AC mains lead for the first time or
there was a power failure recently. Set the clock.
“ADJUST CLOCK”
• Clock is not set. Adjust the clock accordingly.
“ADJUST TIMER”
• Play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer accordingly.
“AUTO OFF”
• The unit has been left unused for about 20 minutes
and will shut down in a minute. Press any button to
cancel it.
“CHECKING CONNECTION”
• The unit is checking the connected USB device.
“ERROR”
• An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions
and try again.
“F” / “F” (“ ” stands for a number.)
• There is a problem with this unit.
Disconnect the AC mains lead from the AC outlet, reconnect
it to the outlet after about 30 seconds. Wait for about 10
seconds, then turn on the unit. If the problem still persists,
disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.
“NO DEVICE”
• The USB device is not connected. Examine the
connection.
“NO DISC”
• You have not put in a disc or put in a disc that the
system cannot play.
“NO PLAY”
• Examine the content. You can only play supported
format. (> 14)
• The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format
the USB device and try again.
• The unit may have a problem. Turn the unit off and
then on again.
“NO PRESET” ([PMX92])
• There are no preset DAB/DAB+ stations to select.
Preset some channels.
“NO SIGNAL” ([PMX 92])
• This station cannot be received. Check your antenna.
“DEVICE NO RESPONSE”
“HUB NOT SUPPORTED”
“NOT SUPPORTED”
• You have connected an unsupported USB device.
“OPT UNLOCKED”
• “OPT” is selected, but no device is connected.
• The sampling frequency components, etc. of the audio
signals are not input correctly.
– For supported formats, refer to “Connecting to OPT IN
(Optical Audio In) terminal” (@ 4).
“PC UNLOCKED”
• “PC” is selected, but a PC is not connected.
“PGM FULL”
• The number of programmed tracks is more than 24.
“PLAYERROR”
• You played an unsupported file. The system will skip
that track and play the next one.
“READING”
• The unit is checking the CD information. After this
display has disappeared, start operating.
• When starting playback of DSD files, it may take time
to read the file. Wait until reading completes.
“REMOTE ” (“ ” stands for a number.)
• The remote control and this unit are using different
codes. Change the code on the remote control.
– When “REMOTE 1” is displayed, press and hold [OK]
and [1] for at least 4 seconds.
– When “REMOTE 2” is displayed, press and hold [OK]
and [2] for at least 4 seconds.
“SCAN FAILED” ([PMX92])
• Stations are not receivable. Check your antenna and try
DAB/DAB+ manual tuning.
“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”
• The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove
the USB device. Switch the system off and on again.
“VBR”
• The system cannot show the remaining play time for
variable bit rate (VBR) tracks.
“WAIT”
• This is displayed, for example, when this unit is turning
off.
Reset the memory when the following situations occur:
• There is no response when buttons are pressed.
• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.
1 Disconnect the AC mains lead.
Wait 30 seconds before you continue with step 2.
2 While you press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit,
connect the AC mains lead again.
Keep holding down [Í/I] until “---------” appears on
the display.
3 Release [Í/I].
All the settings are set back to the factory default.
It is necessary to set the memory items again.
When other Panasonic equipment responds to the
remote control of this system, change the remote control
code for this system.
To set the code to “REMOTE 2”
1
Press [SELECTOR] on the main unit to select “CD”.
2
Press and hold [
∫
] on the main unit and [2] on the
remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.
3 Press and hold [OK] and [2] for a minimum of
4 seconds.
• The factory default is “REMOTE 1”.
• To change the mode back to “REMOTE 1”, repeat the
steps above but replace the button pressed on the
remote control from [2] to [1].
AUX
PC
Main unit displays
Memory reset (initialisation)
Remote control code
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 13 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
)
“NO PLAY”
“NO DISC”
“NO DEVICE”
Komunikat ten jest wyświetlany np. podczas wyłączania urządzenia.
W przypadku wystąpienia poniższych objawów należy
zresetować pamięć urządzenia:
Brak reakcji po naciśnięciu przycisków.
Chęć wyczyszczenia i wyzerowania zawartości pamięci.
Przed przystąpieniem do kroku 2 należy odczekać 30 sekund.
Przytrzymaj [
/I], aż na wyświetlaczu pojawi się “---------”.
Zostaną przywrócone wszystkie ustawienia fabryczne. Konieczne
będzie ponowne zaprogramowanie pamięci.
Jeśli na pilota zdalnego sterowania tego systemu reagują inne
urządzenia rmy Panasonic, należy zmienić kod zdalnego
sterowania dla tego systemu.Konieczne będzie ponowne
zaprogramowanie pamięci.
Ustawienie fabryczne to “REMOTE 1”.
Aby zmienić z powrotem tryb na “REMOTE 1”, powtórz powyższe
kroki, zastępując przycisk, który należy nacisnąć na pilocie: [2] na [1].
Resetowanie pamięci systemu (inicjalizacja)
Kod zdalnego sterowania
Odłącz przewód zasilania
Naciskając i przytrzymując [
/I] na urządzeniu głównym,
podłącz ponownie przewód zasilania
Zwolnij [
/I]
Aby zmienić kod na “REMOTE 2”
Naciśnij [SELECTOR] na urządzeniu głównym, aby
wybrać “CD”.
Paciśnij [SELECTOR] na urządzeniu głównym, aby
Naciśnij i przytrzymaj [
TQBM0358
8
Media playback controls
The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.
Preparation
• Turn the unit on.
• Insert the media or connect the Bluetooth
®
device.
• Press [CD/USB] or [ ] to select the audio source.
Note:
• There will be no sound in search operation when playing
DSD files at USB selector.
• To use this unit’s remote control with a Bluetooth
®
device,
the Bluetooth
®
device must support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile).
Depending on the status of the device, some controls may
not work.
•
[CD] [USB] :Tracks can be selected by pressing the numeric
buttons.
You can display the track, artist, album name, file type,
bit rate, and other information. (The information varies
depending on the audio source.)
Press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
e.g. [USB] (MP3)
Note:
• Maximum characters that can be shown:
approximately 32
• This system supports ver. 1 and 2 ID3 tags.
• Text data that the system does not support can show differently.
1
Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PLAYMODE” or “REPEAT”.
2
Press [
2
,
1
] to select the setting and then press [OK].
Note:
• During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which
have been played or press the numeric buttons.
• Playmode function does not work with “Programme
playback”.
• The mode is cancelled when you open the disc tray or
remove the USB device.
This function allows you to programme up to 24 tracks.
[CD] (CD-DA)
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons to select the desired
track.
Do this step again to programme other tracks.
3 Press [1/;] to start playback.
[CD] (MP3), [USB]
1 Press [PROGRAM] in the stop mode.
“PROGRAM” is shown for a few seconds.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired album.
3 Press [9] and then press the numeric buttons
to select the desired track.
4 Press [OK].
Do steps 2 through 4 again to programme other
tracks.
5 Press [1/;] to start playback.
Note:
• The programme memory is cleared when you open the
disc tray or remove the USB device.
[CD]: CD audio in CD-DA format or a CD that
contains MP3 files
[USB]: USB devices containing MP3/AIFF/FLAC/
WAV/AAC/DSD files
[Bluetooth]:
Connected Bluetooth
®
device
Basic controls [CD] [USB] [Bluetooth]
Play Press [1/;].
Stop Press [∫].
• [USB]: The position is memorised and
“RESUME” is displayed.
• [USB]: Press [∫] twice to stop the
playback fully.
Pause Press [1/;].
Press again to continue playback.
Skip Press [:] or [9] to skip track.
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
[CD]
[USB]
: Press [
3
] or [
4
] to skip the
MP3/AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD
album.
Search During play or pause
Press and hold [6] or [5].
(main unit: [:/6] or [5/9])
Viewing available information [CD] [USB]
[Bluetooth]
“A”: Album number
“T”: Track number
(“ ” stands for a number.)
“ ”: Album “ ”: Track
Play menu [CD] [USB]
PLAYMODE
OFF
PLAYMODE
Cancels the play mode setting.
1-TRACK Only plays the selected track.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
(Skip to the desired track.)
1-ALBUM Only plays the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ” is displayed.
RANDOM Plays the contents randomly.
• “RND” is displayed.
1-ALBUM
RANDOM
Plays the tracks in the selected MP3/AIFF/
FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album randomly.
• Press [3] or [4] to select the MP3/
AIFF/FLAC/WAV/AAC/DSD album.
• “1”, “ ”, “RND” is displayed.
REPEAT
ON REPEAT Turns on repeat mode.
•“`” is displayed.
OFF REPEAT Turns off repeat mode.
Programme playback [CD] [USB]
Check
programme
contents
Press [:] or [9] in the stop
mode.
Clear the last
track
Press [DEL] in the stop mode.
Cancel
programme
mode
Press [PROGRAM] in the stop
mode.
• “PGM OFF” is shown for a few
seconds.
Clear all
programmed
tracks
Press [∫] in the stop mode. “CLEAR
ALL” is shown. Within 5 seconds,
press [∫] again.
SC-PMX90-92-EGEBGN~TQBM0358.book 8 ページ ２０１９年１月１６日　水曜日　午後２時５５分
] na urządzeniu głównym oraz
[2] na pilocie, aż wyświetli się “REMOTE 2”.
3
2
1
3
2
1
Naciśnij i przytrzymaj [OK] i [2] przynajmniej przez 4
sekundy.
Nie włożono płyty lub włożono płytę, której urządzenie nie może
odtworzyć.
Sprawdź zawartość. Odtwarzać można wyłącznie utwory o
obsługiwanym formacie. ( 14)
Pliki w urządzeniu USB mogą być uszkodzone. Sformatuj urządzenie
USB i spróbuj ponownie.
Możliwe, że wystąpił problem z urządzeniem. Wyłącz je i włącz
ponownie.
Nie zaprogramowano stacji DAB/DAB+. Zaprogramuj stacje.
Brak sygnału dla stacji. Sprawdź antenę.
Podłączono nieobsługiwane urządzenie USB.
“OPT” wybrane, ale żadne urządzenie nie zostało podłączone.
Składowe częstotliwości próbkowania itp. sygnałów audio nie są
poprawnie wprowadzane.
Informacje o obsługiwanych formatach znaleźć można w
“Podłączanie do gniazda OPT IN (optyczne wejście audio)” ( 4).
Wybrano “PC”, ale komputer nie jest podłączony.
Liczba zaprogramowanych ścieżek jest większa niż 24.
Został wybrany nieobsługiwany plik. System pominie tę ścieżkę i
odtworzy kolejną.
Urządzenie sprawdza informacje na płycie CD. Gdy zniknie to
wskazanie, rozpocznij obsługę.
Może minąć nieco czasu, zanim urządzenie zacznie odtwarzać pliki
DSD. Należy odczekać, aż zakończy się odczyt.
Pilot i urządzenie używają różnych kodów. Zmień kod na pilocie.
Gdy wyświetlane jest wskazanie “REMOTE 1”, naciśnij i
przytrzymaj [OK] i [1] przez co najmniej 4 sekundy.
Gdy wyświetlane jest wskazanie “REMOTE 2”, naciśnij i
przytrzymaj [OK] i [2] przez co najmniej 4 sekundy.
–
–
–
Zwiększ głośność zewnętrznego urządzenia muzycznego.
Jeśli opcja “OFF” została ustawiona podczas “AUX-IN AUTO PLAY”,
wybierz “ON”.
Podłącz kabel audio do systemu dopiero po wykonaniu wszystkich
innych połączeń.
W przypadku podłączenia zewnętrznego urządzenia muzycznego
wykryte mogą zostać zakłócenia i spowodować automatyczne
przełączenie zestawu na źródło AUX.
Sprawdź środowisko pracy. ( 11)
Ponownie uruchom komputer, włącz i wyłącz system oraz ponownie
podłącz kabel USB.
Wybierz inny port USB w komputerze.
Jeśli korzystasz z komputera z systemem Windows, zainstaluj
odpowiedni sterownik.
Do urządzenia po raz pierwszy podłączono przewód zasilania lub
niedawno wystąpiła przerwa w zasilaniu. Ustaw zegar.
Zegar nie jest ustawiony. Wyreguluj zegar
Timer odtwarzania nie jest ustawiony. Wyreguluj timer
odtwarzania.zegar
Urządzenie nie było używane przez około 20 minut i za minutę
zostanie wyłączone. Naciśnij dowolny klawisz, aby anulować.
Urządzenie główne sprawdza podłączone urządzenie USB.
Wykonano niewłaściwą operację. Przeczytaj instrukcję i spróbuj
ponownie.
Należy odłączyć przewód zasilania od gniazdka sieciowego,
podłączyć go ponownie po około 30 sekundach, a następnie
odczekać około 10 sekund i włączyć urządzenie. Jeśli problem nie
zniknie, należy odłączyć przewód zasilania i skontaktować się ze
swoim sprzedawcą.
Wystąpił problem z urządzeniem.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TQBM0358
14
[PMX92]
Dane techniczne
Dane ogólne
Wzmacniacz
Złącza
Bluetooth
®
Formaty
FM Sekcja
DAB Sekcja
( )
Odtwarzacz płyt CD
Głośniki
Pamięć DAB
Zakres częstotliwości (długość fali)
Głośnikfali)
Impedancja
Wymiary (Szer x Wys x Gł)
Masa
Czułość
*BER 4x10
-4
Podłączenie anteny zewnętrznej DAB
Odtwarzane płyty (8 cm lub 12 cm)
Przechwytywanie
Moc wyjściowa RMS
Zasilanie
Pobór mocy
Wymiary (urządzenie główne)
Masa (urządzenie główne) główne)
Gniazdo słuchawkowe
Specykacja systemu Bluetooth
®
Klasykacja sprzętu bezprzewodowego
Obsługiwane prole
Obsługiwane kodowanie
Pasmo częstotliwości
Zasięg działania
Uwaga:
•
•
USB (USB-A)
PC (USB-B)
AUX IN
AUDIO IN
USB-A
USB-B
Wejście cyfrowe
Pobór mocy w trybie gotowości*
1, 2
Zakres wilgotności roboczej
Zakres temperatury roboczej
“BLUETOOTH STANDBY” jest w stanie “OFF”.
*
1
:
*
2
:
Kanał przedni (przy użyciu obu kanałów)
Całkowita moc RMS
Programowanie stacji
30 stacji
20 stacji
5A do 13F
–98 dBm
(174.928 MHz do 239.200 MHz)
Zakres częstotliwości
Gniazda antenowe
PasmoIII
Złącze typu F (75
™
)
790 nm (CD)
CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3*
3
)
Długość fali
Minimalne wymaganie
87,50 MHz do 108,00 MHz (w krokach co 50 kHz)
75 ™ (niezrównoważone)
Przed przełączeniem do trybu gotowości do portu USB nie jest
podłączone żadne urządzenie.
AC 220 V do 240 V, 50 Hz
Stereo, ∅3,5 mm
FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
(Szer x Wys x Gł) 211 mm x 114 mm x 267 mm
40 W
Około 2,8 kg
0 °C do +40 °C
35 % do 80 % RH
0.35W (Około)
0.45W (Około)
(bez kondensacji)
PRZEDNIE ZŁĄCZE USB Typu A
TYLNE ZŁĄCZE USB Typu B
*
4
:
Stereo, wtyk ∅3,5 mm
Optyczne wejście cyfrowe (gniazdo optyczne)
USB standard
USB standard
MP3/AAC
DSD
DSD
2.8 MHz
AIFF/ FLAC/
WAV
LPCM
32, 44.1, 48 kHz/ 16 do 320 kbps
32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, 192 kHz/ 16,
24 bitów
32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, 192 kHz/ 16,
24 bitów
2.8 MHz
USB 2.0 High Speed
USB 2.0 High Speed
Klasa pamięci masowej USB
Specykacja USB Audio Class
USB Audio Class 2.0, tryb asynchroniczny
Obsługa formatuiczny
Tryb sterowania DSD Natywny tryb ASIO, tryb DoP
Niskotonowy
Wysokotonowy
Sysokotonowy
1,5 cm głośnik kopułowy x 1
3 Ω
161 mm x 238 mm x 262 mm
Około 2,6 kg
1,9 cm głośnik kopułowy x 1
14 cm stożkowy x 1
Obsługa formatu
Obsługa formatu
Wejście liniowe (gniazdo pin)
LPCM
System plików
Zasilanie portu USB WYJŚCIE DC 5 V 1,5 A MAKS
Klasa 2 (2.5 mW)
A2DP, AVRCP
AAC, SBC
Bluetooth
®
Ver.2.1+EDR
2,4 GHz pasmo FH-SS
AOkoło 10 m w zakresie widzenia
*4
Dane techniczne mogą ulec zmianie bez powiadomienia. Masa i
wymiary podane są w przybliżeniu.
Wartość całkowitych zniekształceń harmonicznych została zmierzona
przy użyciu cyfrowego analizatora widma.
Produkt z logiem Hi-Res Audio jest zgodny ze standardem dźwięku o
wysokiej rozdzielczości zdeniowanym przez organizację Japan Audio
Society. Logo to jest wykorzystywane na mocy licencji udzielonej przez
Japan Audio Society.
-
-
-
FLAC Decoder
Redystrybucja i wykorzystanie w formie źródłowej i binarnej, z lub
bez modykacji, jest dozwolone pod warunkiem, że zachowane są
następujące warunki:
Redystrybucja kodu źródłowego musi zachować powyższe
oznaczenie praw autorskich oraz listę warunków i następujące
oświadczenie.
Redystrybucja w formie binarnej musi zachować powyższe
oznaczenie praw autorskich, listę warunków i następujące
oświadczenie w dokumentacji i/lub innych materiałach dostępnych
wraz z dystrybucją.
Zarówno nazwa Xiph.org Foundation, jak i nazwy kontrybutorów nie
mogą być użyte, by reklamować lub promować produkty powstałe z
tego oprogramowania bez specycznej, pisemnej zgody.
TO OPROGRAMOWANIE ZOSTAŁO DOSTARCZONE PRZEZ
WŁAŚCICIELI PRAW AUTORSKICH I KONTRYBUTORÓW „W
POWYŻSZYM STANIE” I WSZELKIE GWARANCJE, IMPLIKOWANE LUB
WYRAŻONE W TYM, ALE NIE OGRANICZONE DO, IMPLIKOWANYCH
GWARANCJI ZDATNOŚCI DO HANDLU I DOSTOSOWANIA DO
OKREŚLONEGO CELU, ZOSTAŁY WYRAŻONE. W ŻADNYM WYPADKU
FUNDACJA LUB KONTRYBUTORZY NIE SĄ ODPOWIEDZIALNI ZA
ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, POŚREDNIE, PRZYPADKOWE, SPECJALNE,
PRZYKŁADOWE LUB WTÓRNE USZKODZENIA (W TYM, ALE NIE
OGRANICZONE DO ZAMAWIANIA LUB SUBSTYTUOWANIA DÓBR
LUB USŁUG, UTRATY UŻYTECZNOŚCI, DANYCH, DOCHODÓW,
LUB PRZESZKODY BIZNESOWEJ), JAKKOLWIEK SPOWODOWANE I
ODNOŚNIE DO DOWOLNEJ TEORII ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI, ZARÓWNO
W KONTRAKCIE, ŚCISŁEJ ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI, LUB DELIKCIE (W
TYM ZANIECHANIU I INNYCH), POWSTAŁE W DOWOLNY SPOSÓB NA
SKUTEK UŻYTKOWANIA TEGO OPROGRAMOWANIA, NAWET JEŚLI
DOPROWADZIŁO DO MOŻLIWOŚCI TAKICH USZKODZEŃ.
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007, 2008,2009
Josh Coalson
szacowany zasięg łączności. Środowisko pomiarowe:
Temperatura 25 °C/Wysokość 1,0 m. Pomiary w “MODE 1”.
60 W na kanał (3 ™), 1 kHz, 10 % THD
120 W
(Gdy “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” jest w stanie “ON”)
*2
(Back of product)
p
© Panasonic Corporation 2019
TQBM0358
F0119MH0
Wyprodukowano przez:
Importer na Europę:
Panasonic Corporation
Panasonic Corporation
http://www.panasonic.com
Strona internetowa:
Kadoma, Osaka, Japan
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Produkt rmy Panasonic
Ten produkt jest objęty e-gwarancją Panasonic.
Prosimy zachować dowód zakupu.
Warunki gwarancji oraz informacje dotyczące tego produktu
są dostępne na www.panasonic.com/pl
lub pod następującym numerem telefonu:
222953727 – numer do połączeń stacjonarnych (kablowych)
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15

Panasonic SCPMX92 Instrukcja obsługi

SCPMX92
Panasonic
Marka
Panasonic
Model
SCPMX92
Kategoria
Odtwarzacze CD
Typ
Instrukcja obsługi
ściągnij PDF
raport

Powiązane dokumenty

Inne dokumenty